Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
PROJECT MANUAL - 17-00309 - 525 S Center St - BYUI Austin Building Remodel - Vol 1
1-1-60301 ARCHITECTURE PLANNING INTERIORS 649 E SOUTH TEMPLE SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84102 801.355.5915 www.crsa-us.com BYU IDAHO BYU Idaho Austin Building Remodel Volume I I Divisions 00-1427 Project Manual May 13, 2017 PERMIT SET- CRSA Project# 17-003 'YU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Division Section Title Pages VOLUME 1 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Group DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Table of Contents 1 Invitation to Bid 2 Notice to Bidders 1 Form of Proposal 5 Instructions to Bidders 3 Form of Contract 4 General Conditions (Fixed Sum) 13 Supplementary Conditions 7 Blank Pay Application 1 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENTAND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION ABLE OF CONTENTS 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017700 CLOSEOUTPROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Construction Section Title DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 033053 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE DIVISION 4 — MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 5— METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS DIVISION 6 — WOOD AND PLASTICS 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 066400 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION DIVISION 8 — OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES AND DOORS 081416 WOOD DOORS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 099123 PAINTING DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES 101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 IYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 102238 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 123661.16 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14—CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 033053 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ABLE OF CONTENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 �Y. 1i'C . _I � i. t. �.: BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work Sequence. 4. Purchase contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: BYU-1 Austin Building Remodel 1. Project Location: BYU-I Austin Building B. Owner: Brigham Young University Idaho 1. Owner's Representative: Andy Johnson, Project Manager C. Architect: CRSA 649 East South Temple Salt Lake City, Utah Contact: Jeff Nielsen 801.746.6813 D. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by the Owner will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. 1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for establishing, administering and using the Project Web site. SUMMARY 011000-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: Bid Package 1: Replacement of AHU and associated MEP equipment. (Previously issued, not a part of this bid). 2. Bid Package 2: Remodel of three levels of the Austin Building including new mechanical systems. B. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas designated by the construction limits shown on the drawings. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: With the exception of areas under construction, the Owner will occupy the Austin Building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not occupy the areas under construction until after a certificate of occupancy is received from the city of Rexburg. The Contractor shall be aware of and conform to all rules, regulations and restrictions for construction activities on and around BYU•1 Campus and shall not interfere with the daily operation and circulation of staff on and around the campus. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. SUMMARY 011000-2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. C. Phasing: Work shall be provided in multiple phases: 1. Phase 1a (Bid Package 1): Beginning July 19, 2017 and concluding by September 11, 2017 2. Phase 1 b (Bid Package 2): Beginning July 19, 2017 and concluding by December 15, 2017 3. Phase 2 (Bid Package 2): Beginning December 15, 2017 and concluding by April 2018 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On -Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: Work is allowed on Saturday from 7:00 AM until 7:00 PM. 2. Sunday Work: Work is not permitted on Sunday. 3. Early Morning Hours: Restrictions on noisy work may be limited by Owner. 4. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Site: Smoking is not permitted on the BYU-I Campus. SUMMARY 011000-3 m BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 012300 -ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No 1: Removal and replacement of the fan wall. B. Alternate No 2: All work in the north area of Level 1. ALTERNATES Section 012300 -Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 END OF SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES Section 012300 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: General Conditions 2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 016000 'Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or similar form containing all of the following information in item 2 Documentation below. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Section 012500 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. I. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC - ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. M. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Section 012500 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. C. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within the bidding period. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Section 012500 - Page 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Section 012500 - Page 4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions. 2. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in General Conditions after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION Section 012600 - Page 1 PROCEDURES BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 e. Quotation Form: Use AIA Forms. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Owner. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit -Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit -price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Owner \ Contractor will issue a Change Order through e -Builder. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on Owner approved form. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION Section 012600 - Page 2 PROCEDURES BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION -012900 -PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions. 2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 012900 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format provided on e -Builder. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 012900 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line - item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line -item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project Manual. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner -requested project acceleration. PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 012900 - Page 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. C. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. Transmittal: Submit all Pay Applications through 9 -Builder. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 012900 - Page 4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Sustainability action plans. 7. Schedule of unit prices. 8. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 9. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 10. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 11. Copies of building permits. 12. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 13. Initial progress report. 14. Report of preconstruction conference. 15. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 16. Performance and payment bonds. 17. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 012900 - Page 5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 012900 - Page 6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. 6. Safety Plan. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field - engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 4. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use Owners Form. Include the following information in tabular form: B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1013100-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Contractor and each sub -contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. C. FBI 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre -installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. Content: Project -specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade -specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1013100-2 BYLI-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire -protection, fire -alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling -mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire -protection, fire -alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. C. Fire -rated enclosures around ductwork. Electrical Work: Show the following a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire -alarm locations. C. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire -Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings (AutoCAD 2006 and Revit 2016). 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format and Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings (AutoCAD 2006 and or Revit 2016). D. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project. a. Perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements by Architect. 2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2016. C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Digital Form provided on owners web -based software (e -Builder). 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1013100-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. The following Contractor -generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. On receipt of Architect's action, review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE A. Use Owner's Internet Based Project Management Software (e -Builder) for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site includes the following functions: 1. Project directory. 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Task and issue management. 7. Photo documentation. 8. Schedule and calendar management. 9. Submittals forms and logs. 10. Payment application forms. 11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating. 12. Online document collaboration. B. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties may be granted access by the Owner to the Owner's Internet Based Project Management Software. 1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1013100-5 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel 0 C. PERMIT SET i May 31, 2017 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. I. Preparation of record documents. M. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. P. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. I. Construction waste management and recycling. U. Parking availability. V. Office, work, and storage areas. W. Equipment deliveries and priorities. X. First aid. Y. Security. Z. Progress cleaning. as. Safety Plan. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. Preinstallation Conferences for the following work shall be indicated in the Project Schedule: a. Chilled water line installation. b. Steam line installation. C. Sewer and water connections. d. Roofing. e. Landscape planting. f. Landscape irrigation. g. Curtain wall framing. h. Cold -formed metal framing. i. Project closeout. j. Commissioning per commissioning specifications. k. High Voltage Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 I. Site Data Work. 2. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. P. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. Y. Protection of construction and personnel. 4. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 5. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 6. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. C. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. L Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. I. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. M. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Participation in progress meetings at regular intervals: 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: Representatives of Owner, Architect and Contractor; (subcontractors, suppliers, vendors and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall only participate when pre -arranged with the Architect). Contactor shall manage subcontractors outside of the progress meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Architect shall be responsible for conducting the meeting and will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1013100-8 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 F. Coordination Meetings: Contractor shall conduct Project coordination meetings at his discretion and notify the Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1013100-9 I BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 1 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. See also General Conditions. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: As per General Conditions. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. 3. Two paper copies. B. Startup construction schedule. Approval of cost -loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost -loaded activities. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 2 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner -furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 3 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. a. Air Handler Fan Replacement b. High Density Storage work. C. Skyfold Doors 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. S. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible — -- -- delivery date. 5. Owner -Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 4 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Building flush -out. M. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. C. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. 9. Other Constraints: . D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones: 1. Completion of each major phase per 011000. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 5 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar -chart -type construction schedule within seven days of date established forthe Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established forthe Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time -scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established forthe Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 6 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer -drawn, time -scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start -total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Section 013200 - Page 7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 2.4 A. PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. REPORTS Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 8 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties" identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 013200 - Page 9 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by. 2400 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out -of -focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image -editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. PHOTOGRAPHIC 013233-1 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions before starting the Work. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. END OF SECTION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC 013233-2 DOCUMENTATION BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device -independent and display resolution -independent fixed -layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD. C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabefic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. I. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal h. Submittal purpose and description. I. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. I. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. M. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. P. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project or via email. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate, and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-4 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 b. Standard color charts. C. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. d. Testing by recognized testing agency. e. Application of testing agency labels and seals. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. b. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches , but no larger than 30 by 42 inches . 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. B. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-6 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Specific quality -assurance and control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality -assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. E. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. F. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency: An 'entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality -Control Plan: For quality -assurance and quality -control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality -control personnel. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY -CONTROL PLAN A. Quality -Control Plan, General: Submit quality -control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality -assurance and quality -control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. C. Testing and Inspection: In quality -control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor -performed tests and inspections including subcontractor -performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor -elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections. ' QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Owner -performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority. D. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. E. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory -Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the State of Utah and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NISTs National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 4 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site -assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 K. Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections and contract drawings, along with supporting materials. L. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups of rooms listed in the contract drawings. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesfing/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality -control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Section 014000 - Page 8 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. REFERENCES Section 014200 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES Section 014200 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Fire -Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire -prevention program. B. Moisture -Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water -damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water -damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire -resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. C. Dust- and HVAC -Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC -control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: Locations of dust -control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 015000-1 CONTROLS BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Location of proposed air -filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust -control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire -resistive sheet, 10 -mil minimum thickness, with flame -spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. B. Dust -Control Adhesive -Surface Walk -off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. — Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 015000-2 CONTROLS BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. C. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to -ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6 -mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6 -mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire -retardant -treated plywood. a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water -dampened foot mats in vestibule. 2. Where fire -resistance -rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air -handling equipment. 6. Provide walk -off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. D. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241: manage fire - prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods avid procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. — 3.3 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture -Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 015000-3 CONTROLS BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum -based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. C. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 015000-4 CONTROLS BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 3. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product" including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Section 016000 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel C. PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE 'Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Section 016000 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Section 016000 - Page 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattem, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard - and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Section 016000 - Page 4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Section 016000 - Page 5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 5. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire -rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or increase deflection EXECUTION 017300-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. C. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire -suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire -detection and -alarm systems. I. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. C. Exterior curtain -wall construction. d. Sprayed fire -resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration -control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. EXECUTION 017300-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, stone sewer, and water -service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be . installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 3. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 'Project Management and Coordination." E. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. EXECUTION 017300-3 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel 3.4 INSTALLATION PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. EXECUTION 017300-4 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. EXECUTION 017300-5 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Pre -installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at pre -installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre -installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F . 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. Remove liquid spills promptly. EXECUTION 017300-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300-7 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Requirements: Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. CONSTRUCTION WASTE 017419-1 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. C. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. D. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. E. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. F. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION and CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. CONSTRUCTION WASTE 017419-2 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Metals: Separate metals by type (If required by vendor). 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. B. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. 3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE 017419-3 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL BLANK PAGE BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings and record Product Data. 5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare, parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. s 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 4 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Organize list of spaces in sequential order,. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title 'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. M. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-6 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer Comments on draft submittals. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 017823-1 DATA BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architects comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architects comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 017823-2 DATA BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Control diagrams. 7. Piped system diagrams. 8. Precautions against improper use. 9. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color -coding where required for identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. C. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 017823-4 DATA BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. C. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. D. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. C. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. I. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. M. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. C. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 6. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-3 Y1ti BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 The Commissioning Process A. Definition 1. Commissioning (Cx) is a systematic quality assurance process which helps ensure that selected equipment and systems are installed and operate per the contract documents and project's design intent. 2. The commissioning process consists of a series of procedures which start as soon as commissioned equipment and systems start being installed and continues thru the end of the construction process. B. Commissioning Authority 1. The Cx process for systems covered by the Cx specifications will be led by independent commissioning authority(s) (CxA). The CxA for this project will be E Cube, Inc. 1.2 Commissioning Team A. The Cx process will be a team effort and will encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, system installation, equipment start-up, control system calibration, testing, balancing, verification, and performance checkouts. B. The Construction Manager/ General Contractor (CM/GC) and Subcontractors installing and/or fumishing equipment and systems listed in Section 1.5 - Scope of Work including their subcontractors, suppliers, vendors and the TAB Contractors will be part of the Cx Team. 1.3 Impact on Contractor Responsibility A. The Cx Process does not reduce the responsibility of the installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product. The Cx Process also does not alter any obligation the Contractors have for operation and maintenance manuals, training or any other contractual requirements. B. The CxA does not have the authority to provide direction to the Contractors. Any issues arising during the Commissioning Process which impact schedules, costs or contractual obligations should be addressed to the CM/GC for resolution. 1.4 Commissioning Process Overview: A. As part of the commissioning process, the contractors shall participate in the following Commissioning Activities: 1. Pre -Functional Procedures (PFPs) consist of a series of field observations conducted during the installation of commissioned equipment to verify that equipment is installed per the contract documents and is ready for startup. 2. Contractor Pre -Startup Testing consists of normally specified contractor testing such as leak testing of ductwork and piping and megger testing of electrical equipment. The commissioning process is used to ensure that this testing is rigorously executed and documented in preparation for equipment startup. 3. Equipment Startup Procedures ensure that startup is performed per the equipment manufacturer's recommended procedures and startup activities and data are documented for future reference. 4. Contractor Post -Startup Testing consists of normally specified contractor testing activities occurring after startup including, but not limited to, TAB of ventilation and hydronic systems, control system point-to-point testing and testing of BAS sequences of operation, individual room thermostat operation, emergency generator testing, etc. The commissioning process provides oversight during the execution and documentation of these tests to ensure successful system operation. 5. Functional Performance Procedures (FPPs) determine if equipment, sub -systems and major systems operate in accordance with the design intent and the contract documents. Specific issues, which will be evaluated in these procedures, include equipment capacity & efficiency, operation of safeties and interlocks, control system operation stability and tuning. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.5 Scope of Work PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 A. The following procedures and requirements apply to all contractors, sub -contractors, suppliers and vendors furnishing and/or installing components, equipment and systems covered by the commissioning scope as outlined below. B. Covered Systems: 1. The commissioning scope will include all the equipment and systems listed in the spec divisions below: a. Division 22 —Plumbing Domestic Water systems b. Division 22 —Plumbing Drain, Waste, Vent systems C. Division 23 —Central Building Automation System d. Division 23— Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems e. Division 26— Lighting and lighting controls systems 2. All of the new equipment in all of the systems listed in 1.5.8.1 above is to be commissioned. 1.6 Contractor Participation A. General 1. Contractors providing and/or installing equipment and systems included in Section 1.5'Scope of Work' above are required to participate fully in the Commissioning Process. 2. Participating Contractors shall include all costs to complete the Cx requirements in their contract price including all costs for sub -contractors, vendors and suppliers. 3. Participating Contractors shall ensure acceptable representation, with the means and authority to prepare, coordinate and execute the Commissioning Process as described in the contract documents. B. Contractor's Commissioning Representative (CCR) 1. Each contractor participating in the Cx Process will designate a single -point contact person to work with the CxA and the Commissioning Team to coordinate commissioning activities, ensure timely execution of Cx Procedures and prompt resolution of commissioning issues. 2. The CCR shall be the contractors Project Manager, Field Superintendent or similar with authority to do the following: a. Make decisions regarding commissioning activities and issues b. Schedule technicians for participation in commissioning activities c. Interface between the Commissioning Team and the contractor's subcontractors, vendors and suppliers. d. Commit to commissioning schedules and completion dates. 3. The CCR will be responsible for coordinating the contractors participation in the Cx Process. As part of this role, the CCR shall: a. Attend all Commissioning Meetings b. Keep the CM/GC and CxA apprised of the contractor's progress, schedules and other matters impacting execution of the Commissioning Procedures. C. Coordinate the contractor's work schedules and staffing to ensure that the qualified technician(s) are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete procedures, tests, adjustments, and/or problem resolutions. d. Ensure that the contractors Commissioning Notebook(s) and Contractor Commissioning Documents are being maintained on-site or on the designated commissioning document website, well organized and current as required in item 1.8 'Commissioning Documentation' of this specification. C. Field Technicians GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. The Contractor shall provide qualified field technicians who are trained and familiar with installation, operation and troubleshooting of systems and equipment being commissioned for participation in the commissioning activities outlined in this document. 2. These same technicians shall be made available to assist the CxA in resolving commissioning Field Observation Notes (FONs®) issues and for repeat and follow-up commissioning tasks as required. 3. Contractors shall arrange for and provide technicians from their sub -contractors, vendors and suppliers where specified and where contractor's own personnel lack the required training or experience necessary to ensure that all commissioned equipment and systems are correctly installed and fully functional. 4. System performance problems and discrepancies may require additional technician time, CxA time, reconstruction of systems, and/or replacement of system components. The additional technician time will be made available for subsequent Cx periods at no cost to the Owner until the required system performance is obtained. 1.7 Coordination & Scheduling A. Commissioning Meetings 1. Commissioning Orientation Kick -Off Meeting a. The CxA will conduct and initial Commissioning Orientation Kick -Off Meeting for the Contractors and selected Subcontractors to familiarize all parties with the Cx process, and to ensure that the roles and responsibilities of each party are clearly understood. b. This meeting will be scheduled by the CM/GC and CxA after awarding of contracts but prior to the start of materials installation. c. Contractors shall arrange for their Commissioning Representative (CCR) and any other staff members that will be involved in the commissioning process through the course of the project to attend this meeting. 2. On-going Commissioning Progress Meetings a. The CxA will conduct regularly scheduled Commissioning Progress Meetings for the duration of the project construction phase. b. The purpose of these meetings will be to coordinate and schedule Cx activities, review Cx activity status, and discuss status and resolution of Cx issues (i.e. Field Observation Notes®). c. Cx Progress Meetings will start soon after installation of commissioned systems begins and will occur as appropriate. d. Contractors shall arrange for their Commissioning Representative (CCR) to attend these meetings. B. Scheduling of Cx Activities 1. The Contractors will work with the CM/GC and CxA to schedule the Cx activities using established protocols. Most of this work will be conducted as part of the On -Going Commissioning Meetings. Once scheduled, the commissioning activities will be integrated into the master schedule by the CM/GC. 2. Coordination, scheduling and completion of Contractor commissioning activities described in this specification are the responsibility of the Contractor(s) and the CM/GC. Note that the Cx schedule relies on the progress of the construction schedule, for which the CM/GC and Contractor(s) are also responsible. 3. Scheduling problems will be brought to the attention of the CxA and CM/GC in a timely manner in order to expedite the Cx Process and to minimize interruption to both the construction and commissioning schedules. 4. Commissioning of systems will proceed per the criteria established in the specific sections that follow, with activities to be performed on a timely basis. 5. In general, Pre -functional Procedures and Contractor Pre -startup Testing will be completed and documented prior to equipment startup. Exceptions to this requirement may be allowed, with prior agreement by the Commissioning Team and CM/GC, if needed to expedite progress. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 6. Equipment Startup Procedures and Contractor Post -startup Testing (including TAB, Control Contractor Point -to -Point Testing and Control Contractor Sequence Checkouts) will be successfully completed, and fully documented prior to initiation of Functional Performance Procedures and Integrated System Procedures. 7. Issues identified during execution of the Commissioning Process and documented by the CxA on the Field Observation Notes® will be addressed promptly to minimize the potential for schedule disruptions and to prevent the accumulation of large numbers of outstanding issues as the job progresses. C. Notification of Field Activities 1. Many of the Commissioning Procedures which will be performed by the Contractors need to be witnessed and signed -off by either the CM/GC and/or Commissioning Team. Selected Commissioning Procedures may also be witnessed by the Owner. 2. To facilitate witnessing of these procedures, the Contractor(s) must provide advance notice to the CM/GC and Commissioning Team prior to procedure execution. The amount of advance notice required will be jointly agreed to by the CM/GC, Cx Team and Contractor. Typical intervals are 48 — 72 hours, but in no case will notification be less than 24 hours prior to procedure execution. 3. Any procedures may be witnessed by the CM/GC, CxA or other appropriate member of the Cx Team. It is the contractor's responsibility to coordinate with the CM/GC in advance of each procedure to ensure that the appropriate personnel will be available to witness as desired. Procedures which have been conducted without adequate notice will be deemed incomplete and will be re -tested by the contractors (with witnesses present) at no cost to the Owner and without delay to either the construction or commissioning schedules. 1.8 Commissioning Documentation A. General 1. Timely and accurate documentation of commissioning activities is essential for the commissioning process to be effective. To this end, all commissioning activities conducted by the contractors shall be documented as outlined below and in Part 3 Execution of this specification. 2. Contractor Commissioning Documents which will be completed by the contractors include the following: a. Prefunctional Checklists b. Pre -startup Contractor Test Forms C. Equipment Startup Plans and Forms d. Post -startup Contractor Test Forms & Reports 3. All Contractor Commissioning Documents prepared by the contractors will be fully completed in a neat and workmanlike manner so as to be fully legible. Documentation which, at the _ Commissioning Team's discretion, is incomplete, inaccurate or less than fully legible shall be deemed unacceptable. 4. Commissioning procedures and tests, which are rejected by the team due to incomplete, inaccurate or illegible contractor documentation, shall be repeated by the contractor and new Contractor Commissioning Documents shall be prepared to the Commissioning Team's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Procedures deemed unacceptable by the Commissioning Team after being repeated due to inadequate documentation may be subject to completion by the CxA, as outlined in item 3.10 'Cost of Re -Evaluation' below. 6. All Contractor Commissioning Documents will be completed on the job -site, concurrent with the activities being documented. Remedial documentation of commissioning activities either off-site or after the procedures have been completed is unacceptable. 7. All Contractor Commissioning Documents will be submitted to the Commissioning Team for review and acceptance upon completion. B. Commissioning Document Management 1. All Contractor Commissioning Documents (including both in -progress and completed documentation) shall be maintained on an electronic document management system. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 a. The CxA and CM/GC shall determine the best electronic management solution for the project. Acceptable approaches include: CxAlloy, Box.com, Dropbox.com, Bluebeam or other as agreed to by the Cx team. b. Contractors shall provide and utilize their own laptop computers, tablet PC, etc. as necessary to support the electronic document management system. c. Contractors shall maintain, upload and update documents within a week of task completion and notify the commissioning team of all uploads as they occur. 2. If approved by the Commissioning Team, contractor may also maintain their Commissioning Documents on-site in the contractor's field office, neatly organized, in 3 -ring notebooks known as Commissioning Notebooks. The Contractor will keep the material in the Notebooks up-to-date on a daily basis as commissioning tasks occur. Commissioning Notebooks shall be labeled on both cover and spine to indicate the contractor's name, the project name and the notebook's contents. The CxA will assist the contractors in setting up and organizing their Commissioning Notebooks. Commissioning Notebooks shall be kept available to the Cx Team and CM/GC for their review. C. Record Drawings 1. Contractors shall regularly update a 'redlined' set of record drawings showing commissioned systems as work is being installed so that the drawings remain current with the field work, and as required in Division 01 of the project specifications. 2. Redlining record drawings at the end of construction shall not be acceptable 3. The Contractors up-to-date, in -progress redlines shall be kept on-site in the Contractor's field office and available for review by the Cx Team. D. Access to Contractor Documentation 1. Contractors shall provide the CxA with access to shop drawings, coordination drawings, equipment cut -sheets, schematics, in -progress record drawings, etc. to assist the CxA in execution of the Cx process. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 Test Equipment A. General 1. The party responsible for each Commissioning Procedure shall furnish all tools, equipment and instrumentation required for execution of that Procedure. 2. Testing equipment and instrumentation used for execution of Commissioning Procedures will be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: a. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers: certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 1.0 OF and a resolution of + or - 0.1 OF. b. Pressure sensors: accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and calibrated within the last year. C. Electrical meters (voltage, current, etc.) shall be true RMS and shall have been calibrated within the last year. d. Specialty meters (db, RF, etc.) shall be calibrated with the last year. e. Other sensors used for testing, (RH, CO, CO2, etc.) shall have been calibrated within the last 6 months. 3. All test equipment and instrumentation used for Commissioning Procedures will be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. 4. Calibration tags will be affixed or certificates readily available. B. Proprietary Test Equipment 1. Proprietary test equipment, interface devices and software required by any contractor, vendor or equipment manufacturer for programming, start-up, or other commissioning activity whether GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment for use during commissioning. 2. The Contractor or Manufacturer providing such equipment will demonstrate its use, and assist in the Cx process as needed. 3. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents will be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. 2.2 BAS Hardware and Software Support A. Field Panel Software and Hardware 1. The BAS Contractor shall furnish the CxA with one (1) copy of all hardware and software needed to connect to, communicate with and command the BAS field panels and controllers at no additional charge to the CxA. This hardware and software will be used by the CxA for execution of the commissioning process. Software and hardware provided to the CxA for this purpose, does not include any provisions for use by the Project Test & Balance Contractor (PTB). 2. Hardware and software covered under this requirement includes, but is not limited to: a. Latest versions of any and all proprietary software. b. Communication modules, software keys, and similar hardware needed for communication from a laptop computer, PDA or similar device to field panels or controllers. C. Proprietary cables required for communication between laptop computers or PDAs to field panels or controllers. d. Passwords, access levels and similar software permissions necessary for execution of the Cx Process. 3. Software and hardware manuals for all control system hardware and software provided to the CxA. a. This requirement is not meant to include provision of standard hardware such as laptop computers and PDAs nor provision of standard software such as Windows or MS Explorer. b. At the conclusion of the Commissioning Process, this hardware and software will be turned over to the Owner's Facility Management personnel for their use in operating and maintaining the building. B. Front -End Software & Hardware 1. The BAS Contractor shall furnish the CxA with one (1) copy of their front-end software and associated hardware as needed to connect to, communicate with and command the BAS at no additional charge to the CxA or the project. 2. Hardware and software covered under this requirement includes, but is not limited to: a. Proprietary software needed to communicate to field panels or controllers. Revision levels for all software shall be identical with the revision level being provided to the project for the front- end operator workstation(s). b. Communication modules, software keys, and similar hardware needed for operation of the software or to communicate with the BAS. c. Proprietary cables required for communication between laptop computers and the BAS. d. Passwords, access levels and similar software permissions necessary for execution of the Cx Process. e. Software and hardware manuals for all control system hardware and software provided to the CxA. 3. This requirement is not meant to include provision of standard hardware such as laptop computers nor provision of standard software such as Windows or MS Explorer. 4. At the conclusion of the Commissioning Process, this hardware and software will be turned over to the Owner's Facility Management personnel for their use in operating and maintaining the building. C. Operator Workstation Access GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. The BAS Contractor shall provide the CxA with software and hardware needed for accessing the BAS' front-end operator workstation(s). At a minimum, this shall include appropriate level user identification names and passwords. Access level shall allow the CxA to fully execute all commissioning procedures and will include the ability to: a. View system operation b. Override set -points c. Command digital and analog output points d. View BAS programming source code (read-only) e. View and print graphics f. Create, view, modify, print and download trend logs, histories and reports D. Technical Support 1. The BAS Contractor shall also provide technical support to the CxA as reasonably requested by the CxA regarding setting up and operating BAS hardware and software to support successful execution of the Cx Process. E. Duration of Support 1. Use of hardware and software provided under this section may be limited to the duration of the Cx Process at the BAS Contractors discretion, but shall not be terminated until final completion of the Cx Process including resolution of all outstanding construction phase FONs® issues and successful execution of Post -Occupancy phase commissioning activities. 2.3 Electrical Monitoring System Hardware and Software Support A. The contractor providing the Electrical Monitoring System shall provide the CxA with software and hardware as outlined in section 2.2 above, where applicable, to support commissioning of the electrical monitoring and distribution systems. B. At the conclusion of the Commissioning Process, this hardware and software will be turned over to the Owner's Facility Management personnel for their use in operating and maintaining the building. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Pre -functional Procedures A. Scope 1. The Pre -functional Procedures (PFP) consists of a series of field observations and documentation conducted during the installation of commissioned equipment to verify the following: a. Installed equipment matches the specifications and approved submittals b. Equipment is installed per the specifications, drawings, manufacturer's recommendations, and good current practice c. Utility connections to equipment, such as electrical, steam, chilled water, etc. have been successfully completed d. Equipment is ready for start-up 2. Contractors should expect to complete one (1) Pre -functional Checklist for each major piece of equipment covered by the commissioning process such as chillers, boilers, pumps, fans, air handling units, control panels, switchgear, substations, and electrical distribution panels. 3. Additional checklists will be required to verify installation of terminal and distribution systems such as VAV terminal units, unit heaters, piping, ductwork, electrical wire and conduit, etc. The number of required Pre -functional Checklists will vary from system to system, and may be limited to one checklist per system per zone (or possibly per floor) for repetitive items. 4. Refer to Appendix A for a list of checklists required for this project. B. Pre -functional Checklists 1. The actual checklists used on this project will be provided by the CxA. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. The Pre -functional Checklists used for this project will be finalized by the CxA after receipt of equipment Installation, Operation & Maintenance (IOM) Manuals from the Contractors (see item C1 below). 3. Pre -functional Checklists shall be completed and maintained on-site per the requirements of this specification, Section 1.8 'Commissioning Documentation'. C. Contractor Requirements 1. The Contractors shall provide the CxA with one (1) copy of the equipment manufacturer's standard Installation, Operation and Maintenance (IOM) Manuals within 60 days after approval of submittals. The CxA will use the installation recommendations included in these documents to finalize the Pre - functional Checklists. 2. The contractors furnishing and/or installing the equipment being commissioned will be responsible for the execution of the Pre -functional Procedures and accurate completion of the Pre -functional Checklists for that equipment. 3. The CxA will provide oversight and assistance to the contractors during the execution of the Pre - functional Procedures and will periodically review the contractors in -progress Pre -functional Checklists for accuracy, completeness and to verify that checklists are being kept up-to-date. 4. Contractors shall begin execution of the Pre -functional Procedures as soon as the affected equipment arrives on the job site, by verifying nameplate information matches the specifications and approved submittals. 5. During installation, the contractors shall regularly review and update the appropriate Pre -functional Checklists so that potential installation issues are identified as early in the construction process as possible. The CxA will periodically review the contractor's in -progress Pre -functional Checklists to verify that they are current with the project status. 6. Issues observed during the PFPs will be immediately reported to the CM/GC and CxA in accordance with the procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.6 'Issue Resolution'. 7. PFP's will be substantially complete, reviewed and accepted by the CxA prior to equipment start- up. Exceptions to this requirement will be allowed at the CxA's discretion, but will be limited to minor items, such as labeling of equipment, which will not impact start-up or subsequent equipment operation. 8. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the PFPs. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification. 3.2 Contractor Pre -Startup Testing A. Scope 1. Commissioning activities and requirements related to contractor/vendor pre -startup testing for commissioned equipment and systems will follow the process described in this section. This process does not reduce the contractor's responsibility for successfully completing and — documenting all testing requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications. 2. The goals of these activities are to help ensure that the specified testing is rigorously executed using sound test procedures and that all tests are thoroughly documented. B. Contractor Pre -startup Test Forms 1. The Contractor Pre -startup Testing shall be documented using test fors which, at a minimum, will record the following information: a. Type of test being performed (hydrostatic leak test, pneumatic leak test, megger test, db, RF, flows, etc.) b. System or equipment being tested c. Technician(s) performing the test d. Test date and time e. Detailed description of section of system being tested (if applicable) f. All data collected during the test to quantify test performance (static and differential pressures, test duration, electrical resistance, etc.) GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-8 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 g. Signature of technician(s) performing test h. Signature of CM/GC or Cx Team member witnessing the test 2. Contractors and vendors may use their standard testing forms; providing these forms meet the requirements outlined above and have been previously reviewed and approved by the Cx Team. 3. If standard test fors are not available, the CxA will assist the Contractors and Vendors in developing test fors for the Contractors and Vendors use. 4. All test forms will be fully completed and maintained by the contractor per the requirements of this specification, Section 1.8 'Commissioning Documentation'. 5. All test fors will be submitted to the CM/GC for review and acceptance by the Cx Team upon completion. C. Contractor Requirements 1. Prior to initiating any of the Pre -startup Testing covered by this specification the contractor will meet with the CxA to review the contractor's proposed test procedures and test fors. 2. The contractor shall be responsible for successful completion and documentation of all specified pre -startup testing. 3. The CM/GC and/or the Cx Team will witness selected Pre -startup Tests to ensure that approved procedures are being followed and that tests are being properly documented. 4. Any Pre -startup Tests may be witnessed by the CM/GC, CxA or other appropriate member of the Cx Team. It is the contractor's responsibility to coordinate with the CM/GC in advance of each test to ensure that the appropriate personnel will be available to witness the test as desired. Tests which have been conducted without adequate notice will be deemed incomplete and will be re- tested by the contractors. 5. Issues observed during the Contractor Pre -startup Testing will be immediately reported to the CM/GC and CxA in accordance with procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.6 'Issue Resolution'. 6. All Contractor Pre -startup Testing shall be substantially complete, reviewed and accepted by the CxA prior to equipment start-up. Exceptions to this requirement will be allowed at the CxA's discretion, but will be limited to minor items, which will not impact start-up or subsequent equipment operation. 7. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the Pre -startup Testing. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification. 3.3 Contractor Start-up Procedures A. Scope 1. Commissioning activities and requirements related to Equipment Startup are meant to help ensure the following: a. Equipment installation and Pre -startup Testing has been fully completed and documented prior to startup b. Startup procedures meet the equipment manufacturer's recommendations c. Startup activities are fully documented B. Equipment Startup requirements covered by this section of the commissioning specification include the following: 1. All commissioned equipment requiring startup by the equipment manufacturer, vendor or representative 2. All rotating equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, fans, compressors, and generators with a motor or engine size of 1 hp or greater or serving critical equipment. 3. All electrical equipment including, but not limited to switchgear, substations, transformers and distribution panels operating at 460V or greater 4. Where required in the specifications regardless of size or voltage. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-9 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel C. Equipment Startup Plan PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. At least 30 days prior to scheduled Equipment Startup, the responsible contractor shall prepare and submit a written Startup Plan which, at a minimum, will include the following: a. Personnel required for startup including vendors, other trades, etc. b. Prerequisites required for startup (utility connections, PFP's, Pre -startup Testing, and other as applicable) C. Proposed startup procedures d. Proposed forms to be used for documenting startup procedures e. Proposed preventive maintenance forms and procedures (if equipment to be kept in service after startup) 2. Where available, the equipment manufacturer's standard startup procedures and forms should be used as the basis of the contractor's Startup Plan. Where equipment manufacturer's standard startup procedures and/or forms are not available, the Cx Team will assist the contractors in developing the necessary procedures and forms. 3. The Cx Team will review the contractors proposed Startup Plan(s) and will recommend revisions as appropriate prior to scheduling of startup activities. 4. Startup of covered equipment shall be documented using Startup Forms which have been previously reviewed and approved as part of the contractor's Startup Plan. 5. All Startup Forms will be fully completed and maintained by the contractor per the requirements of this specification, Section 1.8 'Commissioning Documentation'. 6. All Startup Forms will be submitted to the CM/GC for review, and acceptance by the Cx Team upon completion. D. Equipment Startup Schedule 1. At least 30 days prior to the first scheduled Equipment Startup, the CM/GC, with help from the responsible contractors, shall submit a written Startup Schedule which, at a minimum, will include the following: a. Personnel required for startup including vendors, other trades, etc. b. Date and time of scheduled startup C. Pre -requisite start-ups (such as VFDs), Safeties and pre -start-up testing requirements 2. The CM/GC shall conduct a scheduling meeting to review the Startup Schedule with the Contractor and the CxA. 3. This schedule shall be modified if any parameter (time, date, personnel etc.) changes and distributed immediately to the required personnel. E. Contractor Requirements 1. The Contractor(s) will coordinate with the CM/GC to schedule startup activities. This will include the following: a. Ensuring that all PFP's and contractor Pre -startup Testing are completed and documented prior to startup b. Ensuring that all required utilities are available prior to startup C. Ensuring that appropriate personnel have been identified and scheduled to participate including vendors, manufacturer's representatives, other trades, etc. d. Tools, test equipment and/or instrumentation required for startup will be available 2. No unscheduled and/or inappropriate startups shall be allowed. 3. The use of startup forms, procedures, or documents that have not been previously approved by the Cx Team, as part of the Equipment Startup Plan, will not be accepted as startup documentation. 4. The Cx Team and/or CM/GC will witness selected startups to ensure that approved procedures are being followed and that activities are being properly documented. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-10 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 5. Any Startup procedures may be witnessed by the CM/GC, CxA or other appropriate member of the Cx Team. It is the contractor's responsibility to coordinate with the CM/GC in advance of each procedure to ensure that the appropriate personnel will be available to witness the test as desired. Procedures which have been conducted without adequate notice will be deemed incomplete and will be re -tested. 6. Issues observed during execution of the Startup Procedures will be immediately reported to the CM/GC and CxA in accordance with procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.6 'Issue Resolution'. 7. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the Startup Procedures. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification. B. Equipment which will not be left in operation after startup shall be laid -up by the contractor per the manufacturer's recommended procedures. 9. Equipment kept in use after startup, shall be operated and maintained by the responsible Contractor per the equipment manufacturers published O&M procedures. 10. All maintenance activities performed by the Contractor(s) will be documented on pre -approved maintenance work order forms. These forms may be furnished by the Owner's Facilities Management Department; otherwise the contractors will develop appropriate forms and submit them for review and approval as part of their startup plan. 11. Completed maintenance work order forms shall be submitted to the CM/GC for review and acceptance by the Cx Team upon completion. 3.4 Contractor Post -Startup Testing A. Scope 1. Commissioning activities and requirements related to Contractor Post -startup Testing for commissioned equipment and systems will follow the process described in this section. This process does not reduce the contractor's responsibility for successfully completing and documenting all testing requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications. 2. The goal of these activities are to augment the testing requirements listed elsewhere in the specifications and to help ensure that the specified testing is rigorously executed using sound test procedures and that all tests are thoroughly documented. B. Contractor Post -startup Test Reports 1. The Contractor Post -startup Testing shall be documented using test forms which, at a minimum, will record the following information: a. Type of test being performed (duct traverse, point-to-point checkout, etc.) b. System or equipment being tested c. Technician(s) performing the test d. Test date and time e. Detailed description of system or section of system being tested f. All data collected during the test to quantify test performance (pressures, flow rates, rpm, volts, amps, temperatures, etc.) g. Signature of technician(s) performing test h. Signature of CM/GC or Cx Team member witnessing the test (where applicable) 2. Contractors may use their standard testing forms; providing these fors meet the requirements outlined above and have been previously reviewed and approved by the Cx Team. 3. The use of Post -startup testing forms, procedures, or documents that have not been previously approved by the Cx team, will not be accepted as Post -startup testing documentation. 4. All test forms will be fully completed and maintained by the contractor per the requirements of this specification, Secflon 1.8 'Commissioning Documentation'. 5. All test forms will be submitted to the CM/GC for review and acceptance by the Cx Team upon completion. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-11 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel C. General Requirements PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Prior to initiating any of the Post -startup Testing covered by this specification, the contractor shall meet with the CxA to review the contractor's proposed test procedures and test forms. 2. The contractor shall be responsible for successful completion and documentation of all specified Post -startup Testing. 3. The CxA will provide oversight and assistance to the contractors in developing their test procedures and test forms. 4. The CM/GC and/or Cx Team will witness selected Post -startup Tests to ensure that approved procedures are being followed and that tests are being properly documented. 5. Issues observed during the Contractor Post -startup Testing will be immediately reported to the CM/GC and CxA in accordance with procedures outlined in this specification, Section 3.6 'Issue Resolution'. 6. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the Post -startup Testing. All instruments shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification. 7. The Contractor shall provide a written list of instrumentation which will be used for Post -startup Testing indicating instrument make, model number, serial number, range, accuracy and calibration date to the CxA prior to the start of testing. D. HVAC Test and Balance 1. The Test, Adjust and Balance (TAB) Contractor shall be responsible for successful completion and documentation of all TAB activities specified in Div 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate. 2. Prior to the start of TAB activities, the TAB contractor shall submit proposed TAB procedures and documentation to the CxA for review. 3. After this review, and prior to start of fieldwork, the TAB contractor will attend one or more planning meetings as required with the Commissioning Team to review and discuss outstanding issues relating to TAB procedures and forms, discuss resolution of issues identified during the TAB contractor's plan review and field inspections, and to coordinate field work. 4. Prior to the start of field work, the TAB contractor shall issue a final set of TAB procedures and TAB forms incorporating comments received from the Commissioning Team review 5. The TAB contractor shall notify the Commissioning Team a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of the time for start of TAB work to allow the CxA time to assess system readiness. 6. The TAB contractor shall work cooperatively with the CxA 7. The TAB contractor shall coordinate with the controls contractor to ensure that changes made to the control system during TAB (flow coefficients, duct areas, etc.) are archived and become the default or initial values for these parameters. 8. The TAB contractor shall ensure that all areas of the project are balanced to the appropriate air pressure relationships for those areas (negative or positive pressure). 9. The TAB contractor shall provide daily lists of issues and/or problems identified during TAB work to the CM/GC and CxA for follow-up & resolution with the appropriate contractors. 10. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic purposes. a. The TAB Final Acceptance Inspection specified in Div 23 shall be conducted by the CxA and will include a field verification of up to 10% of the PTB's field readings. b. The TAB contractor shall provide technicians and instrumentation to support the field verification. C. Instruments used for the field verification shall be the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used for the original TAB work. d. Failure of an item during the TAB field verification is defined as: GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-12 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 i. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent from the reported value. ii. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 decibels. (Note: variations in background noise must be considered). e. A failure of more than 10 percent of the readings tested during the field verification shall result in the rejection of the final TAB report and require re -balancing of the system(s) in question. E. Controls & Instrumentation Testing 1. Prior to start of control system Functional Performance Procedures, the Building Automation System (BAS) Contractor shall verify and document that all control systems are installed and operating properly including the following: a. Control Panels & Hardware Installation shall be fully verified and the appropriate Pre - Functional checklists completed prior to proceeding to subsequent installation/checkout steps. b. Point -to -Point Checkout shall be completed and documented per the requirements specified in Division 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate, and item 3 below. c. Control Seauence Checkout. Contractor shall verify that operation of control system programming matches all specified sequences of operation. For these checkouts, the Contractor shall, as much as possible, simulate actual operating conditions for the various operating modes being tested (heating, cooling, emergency power, etc.) by false -loading systems, adjusting setpoints and similar techniques. The CxA will make the control sequence FP Checklists available to the BAS Contractor for use in these checkouts. i. The BAS Contractor shall be required to complete, sign, and submit the control sequence FP checklists to the CxA for review prior to scheduling any control sequence checkouts by the CxA. These checklists shall also be signed by the CM/GC. d. Tune all Control Loops to obtain the fastest stable response without unreasonable hunting, offset or overshoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop and provide trend reports to document results. Trend logs shall show both steady-state operation and response to setpoint changes as specified in Division 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate. e. Test All Alarms and Safeties. Record all alarm parameters and alarm messages. Document all alarms and safeties have been tested and are functioning properly. 2. The BAS Contractor shall work with the TAB Contractor(s) to make sure that changes to the BAS made during TAB, such as flow coefficients, flow setpoints and duct areas are permanently archived in the BAS and become the initial or default values for their respective controllers. If BAS adjustments made by the TAB Contractor(s) get lost or overwritten prior to archiving, it shall be the BAS Contractor's responsibility to re-enter this data at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Point -to -Point Checkout Requirements a. Items described in this section apply to and augment the Field Points Testing requirements as specified in Division 23 and elsewhere in these specifications as appropriate. b. These procedures will verify the following for each physical control point: I. Field device is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and the project drawings and specifications ii. Field verify calibration of all analog inputs and outputs iii. Verify labeling of controllers, field devices, and wiring iv. Physical points are correctly addressed and communicating properly between its controller and the field device. c. Detailed written procedures for execution of Point -to -Point Checkouts shall be submitted to the CxA and Engineer by the Contractor for review and approval prior to the start of testing. Proposed procedures shall be based on the manufacturer's recommendations and good current practice. Include proposed test forms as part of this submittal. d. The Contractor shall provide all tools and instrumentation necessary for execution of this testing. All instrumentation must be in calibration and meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-13 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 e. The CxA reserves the right to field verify up to 10% of the Contractors Point -to -Point Checkout testing. The Contractor shall provide the technicians and instrumentation used for the original testing to assist the CxA with this field verification. 3.5 Functional Performance Procedures A. Scope 1. Functional Performance Procedures (FPP) are executed after commissioned equipment and systems have been installed, started -up and balanced. The goal of these procedures is to verify that commissioned equipment, sub -systems and major systems operate and perform per the design intent and the project specifications. 2. Equipment -level FPPs will be used to verify operation and capacity of selected equipment such as boilers, chillers cooling towers, pumps, exhaust fans, air handling units, etc. 3. System -level FPPs will verify the following aspects of system operation: a. System operation under both normal and alternate operating conditions and modes b. Interactions between equipment and sub -systems c. Operation of safeties and interlocks d. Control system operation, response time, stability and tuning e. System response to abnormal and/or emergency conditions such as equipment failure and power outages f. Prepare for execution of Emergency System Procedures and/or Integrated System Procedures if included in the project scope B. Functional Performance Checklists 1. Functional Performance Checklists will be provided by the CxA 2. The Functional Performance Procedures and Checklists used for this project will be finalized by the CxA after receipt of approved contractor submittals, including equipment Installation — Operations & Maintenance bulletins. C. Contractor Requirements 1. The CM/GC will coordinate and schedule FPP activities in conjunction with the contractors and other members of the Cx Team. 2. Scheduling of FPPs will be contingent on notification from the affected contractor(s) to the CM/GC and CxA that equipment and systems are ready for checkout. 3. Other prerequisites for execution of FPPs shall include the following: a. All PFP's, Contractor Pre -startup Testing and Startup Procedures have been completed and — documented b. TAB has been completed C. Field Observation Notes® affecting equipment or system performance or operation have been resolved 4. Prior to claiming readiness for FPP, the controls contractor shall ensure that the following items are completed and documented: a. Point-to-point checkouts b. Verify that network communication between all devices and systems is established C. Sequence of Operation checkouts d. Printed and annotated trend logs and histories establishing acceptable operation including I. Stable control ii. Recovery from upset/changes (e.g., from setback) M. Special and/or seasonal modes GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-14 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 iv. Emergency and alarm modes including loss/restoration of power 5. Execution of the FPPs will be led by the CxA with assistance from the contractors providing and installing the equipment and systems being commissioned. 6. Typical contractor activities during FPP execution may include the following: a. Starting/stopping equipment b. Energizing/de-energizing electrical distribution gear c. Opening/closing valves and dampers d. Manipulating BAS inputs, outputs and setpoints e. Setup, collection and downloading of BAS trend data 7. Alternately, these activities may be performed directly by the CxA with prior permission from the appropriate contractor(s). In either case, the Contractor(s) shall maintain full responsibility for the facility, equipment and systems operated during the FPPs, maintain all guarantees and warranties, and shall repair any damage to the facility caused during the FPPs. 8. Contractors shall provide the services of vendor's technicians at the CxA's request to assist in commissioning of major equipment such as chillers, boilers and emergency generators. 9. Tools, test equipment and instrumentation required for completion of the FPPs shall be provided by the CxA except for special-purpose or proprietary tools, test equipment and instrumentation which shall be provided by the contractors. All instruments provided by the contractor shall meet the requirements of Part 2 of this specification. 3.6 Issue Resolution A. Scope 1. The CxA will maintain and periodically publish a Field Observation Notes (FONs®) Report, which will be used to document issues identified during the commissioning process. 2. The contractor(s) shall promptly respond to the FONs® Reports in writing concerning the status of each open issue identified as their responsibility during execution of the commissioning process. Contractor responses shall include the following information as appropriate: a. Explanations of any questions or disagreements (issue responsibility incorrectly assigned, issue outside of contractor's scope, etc.) b. Actions taken to resolve issue C. Proposed actions including completion dates 3. The Contractors, including their subcontractors, vendors and suppliers are responsible for resolution of all issues identified during execution of the commissioning process. The CxA will be available to work with the contractors and facilitate issue resolution. 4. Contractors shall responded to the FONsna issues in a timely manner, typically within 72 hours of notification, to avoid impact to the construction schedule including the commissioning process. 5. The information reported in the FONs® shall not be construed to authorize any changes in contractual requirements, schedules or project costs. Any such questions will be promptly directed to the CM/GC or other parties as designated in the contract documents. B. Contractor Requirements 1. During Pre -functional Procedures, Pre -startup Testing, Startup Procedures and Post -startup Testing: a. Issues identified by the contractors during execution of Pre -functional Procedures, Pre -Startup Testing, Startup Procedures or Post Startup Procedures shall be clearly noted on the appropriate Pre -functional Checklist, Startup Form, Test Form, or noted on a separate sheet and attached to the appropriate Checklist or Form. b. Outstanding items of the PFP, Pre -startup Testing, Startup Procedures or Post -startup Testing that were not completed successfully shall also be noted at the bottom of the appropriate Checklist, Form or on an attached sheet. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-15 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 c. Contractors shall notify the CM/GC, with a copy to the CxA, of any outstanding issues or deficiencies in writing within (2) two days of issue identification. d. The CxA will review the issue notification reports and submit any comments and questions to the CM/GC, contractor or A/E as appropriate. e. The oontractor(s), including appropriate subcontractors, vendors and suppliers will work with the CxA to correct and re-evaluate issues or uncompleted items. f. As soon as outstanding items have been corrected, the contractor(s) shall: I. Notify the CM/GC and CxA that the issue has been resolved by updating and resubmitting their issue notification report. ii. Resubmit updated Checklists, Startup Forms and/or Test Forms as applicable g. Issues identified during Prefunctional Procedures and Pre -startup Testing shall be resolved prior to Startup of the affected equipment or system. h. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during execution of FPPs may result in back -charges to the responsible party. Also see "Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect" procedures in this section. 2. During Functional Performance Procedures a. Issues noted during execution of FPPs will be noted on the test forms by the CxA. b. Minor issues may be corrected immediately on identification and prior to proceeding with the procedure being executed at the discretion of the CxA. The CxA's decision will be based on what impact the issue has on the procedure being executed, and the expected time required to resolve the new issue. Issues resolved in this manner, will be documented on the appropriate form or checklist. c. CxA will endeavor to expedite the checkout process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. d. Once any questions are resolved on an issue and the contractor(s) accepts responsibility to correct it: I. The CxA will document the issue on the FONs® Report and the contractor response and intentions and then go on to another procedure or sequence. ii. The contractor(s) will correct the issue, and submit a written statement of correction certifying that the equipment is ready to be re-evaluated to the CxA. iii. The contractor reschedules the re-evaluation with the CM/GC and CxA and the checkout is repeated once. If satisfactory performance is not achieved during the second procedure, the cost of additional procedures will be billed in accordance with the paragraphs below "Cost of Re -Evaluation". e. If there are questions about an issue, regarding whether it is an issue, who is responsible, or how to resolve it: i. The CxA will document the issue on the FONs® Report with the contractor's response and a copy will be given to the CM/GC and contractor representative(s) assumed to be responsible. ii. The CxA will document the resolution process on the FONs® Report. iii. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party will correct the issue, sign a statement of correction and submit it to the CxA. iv. The contractor reschedules the checkout with the CxA and the checkout is repeated once. If satisfactory performance is not achieved during the second procedure, the cost of additional procedures will be billed in accordance with the paragraphs below "Cost of Re - Evaluation". 3. If issues are identified by the CxA during spot-checks of completed contractor Cx Procedures (Pre - functional Procedures, Pre -Startup Testing, Startup Procedures or Post Startup Procedures); it shall be the contractors responsibility to demonstrate that the identified issues are not widespread and pervasive for all similar systems and equipment installed for this project. This may require re- execution of all affected Cx Procedures as determined by the Commissioning Team. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-16 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel C. Cost of Re -Evaluation PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. The cost for Contractors to re -execute any Commissioning Procedure due to open issues shall be borne by the contractors. 2. The CxA will be available for two attempts of any Commissioning Procedure (one initial and one re- try) with minimal follow-up where necessary (due to deficiencies, systems not ready, etc.) to try to accomplish each checkout as part of the contract. When additional work is required because systems are not ready or because they do not successfully pass Commissioning Procedures after they have been indicated as ready, the contractor will be charged for the additional costs. Additional fees will be paid to the CxA by the Owner/CM/GC and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. 3. Any required re -testing by any contractor shall not be allowed as a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the contractor. D. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect 1. If 2%, or ten, whichever is greater, of similar types (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment from one manufacturer or supplier fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing, handling, or similar defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all similar units may be considered unacceptable by the A/E or CM/GC. In such case, the contractor(s) shall provide the Owner with the following: 2. Within one week of notification from the A/E or CM/GC, the contractor shall cause the manufacturer's representative to examine 10% of other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the A/E and CM/GC within two weeks of the original notice. 3. Within two weeks of the original notification, the manufacturer, through the contractor, shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the issue, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions, which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. 4. The A/E and CM/GC will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. 5. Sufficient examples to allow adequate evaluation of the proposed solution will be installed by the contractor, and the CxA and A/E will be allowed to perform PFPs and FPPs on the installations for sufficient time to determine the performance, upon which the A/E and CM/GC will, with recommendations by the CxA, decide whether to accept the solution. 6. After such procedures are performed and the results have been accepted as noted above, the contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. 7. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when units or parts can be obtained. 3.7 Acceptance A. Only after the satisfactory completion of the Pre -Functional Installation, Start-Up/Testing, Functional Performance and System Performance Checkouts will the system be ready for acceptance. At no time will acceptance be made for individual pieces of equipment. Final acceptance will only be for systems that will operate as intended in the basis of design and the design intent. 3.8 Operation and Maintenance Manuals A. The contractor shall provide Owner with manuals for the safe and effective Operation and Maintenance (O&M) of the systems and equipment listed, in this Section. O&M Manual requirements included in other Sections of this Specification are in addition to, and do not replace, those required in this Section. B. Format 1. Unless BYU Idaho requires an alternate format, the following formatting shall be used for O&M Manuals: 2. Bind manuals in durable, locking, 3 -ring binders. Binders shall be white view -type binders with clear plastic overlays to allow insertion of title pages for binder identification. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-17 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 3. Use 8-1/2" x 11" sheets, except that larger sheets up to 11" x 17" may be used when double folded to this size and used as a pullout. Documents which are larger than 11" x 17" shall be reduced to 11" x 17" for inclusion in the manuals except where this compromises legibility (for drawings that are to scale, add a graphic scale prior to reduction). Documents that cannot be reduced will be folded and inserted in plastic envelopes inserted in the binders so that the folded documents are securely bound into the binders. Loosely inserted documents or documents inserted into pockets in the inside covers of the binders shall not be acceptable. 4. Each binder shall be labeled on both cover and spine to indicate project name and Owner's project number, submitting contractor, date, general contents, volume number and total number of volumes in set. 5. At the front of each binder include the following information: a. Master Table of Contents (TOC) identifying chapter headings and numbers for all 0&M Manual volumes provided by the submitting contractor. b. Detailed TOC for the current volume listing, in order, the sections and subsections within each chapter of that specific manual. C. Contact sheet for the submitting contractor listing appropriate contact names, addresses, phone numbers, and email addresses d. Introduction including a brief description of project and purpose of the manual. 6. Manuals shall be divided into chapters based on specification sections. Chapters shall be identified using both the specification section number and name (i.e. 15540 Pumps). Manual chapters shall be further subdivided into sections and sub -sections as appropriate for clarity of organization and to facilitate use by Owner. 7. Chapters shall be separated by index tabs labeled with the covered specification name and number. Chapter division tabs shall be identical to each other in style and appearance, but different than the section division tabs. 8. Major sections within a chapter shall be separated by index tabs, which indicate the equipment or material covered. Section division tabs shall be identical to each other in style and appearance, but different than the chapter division tabs. C. Submittals 1. Format Submittal. The Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of their proposed O&M Manual format including a detailed outline of contents within sixty (60) days after approval of final submittals. Owner will require 14 days for format review. 2. Preliminary Submittal. See Division 1 Architectural requirements for O&M manuals. 3. Final Submittal. See Division 1 Architectural requirements for O&M manuals. D. Purpose 1. The Operation and Maintenance manuals are for the training of, and use by, Owner's employees in the operation and maintenance of the systems and equipment as specified below. The manuals shall consist of instruction on systems and equipment. A separate manual or set of manuals shall be prepared for each class of components, equipment or systems as specified. E. Content 1. Each chapter shall contain the following, information in addition to the requirements specified elsewhere in these specifications. a. Contact list identifying vendors providing equipment and systems covered in the current chapter. This information shall include vendor name, address, name of contact person(s), phone numbers (including 24 hour service numbers where appropriate), fax numbers, and email addresses. b. Equipment/material schedules) for all covered equipment and systems showing equipment identification (tag) number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, quantities, area/system served, equipment location, etc. C. Safety Precautions. This subsection shall comprise a listing of safety precautions and instructions to be followed during operation and before, during, and after repairs or adjustments are made. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS (D2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-18 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Each chapter shall describe the procedures necessary for Owner's personnel to operate and maintain the systems and equipment covered in that chapter. 3. References shall be made, as appropriate, to drawings, schematics, sequences of operation and other information included as part of the construction contract drawings and specifications that show distribution system layout, equipment arrangements and items of control. 4. All information included in the final O&M Manuals, including equipment schedules, manufacturer's literature, drawings, etc. shall represent the "as -built" condition. 5. Manufacturer's literature and other information provided in the O&M Manuals shall be for the actual equipment installed under contract for the particular facility. Where literature (standard product catalogs, cut -sheets, etc.) contains data pertaining to parts, equipment or options other than those specifically provided for this project, the contractor shall clearly indicate the specific products, model numbers, and options provided. Mark-ups made by the contractor for this purpose shall be made in a manner that will clearly photocopy (no highlighters). 6. A brief description of each type of required information follows: a. Warranty information Provide copies of all warranty certificates from equipment manufacturers ii. If not included on warranty certificate, provide the startlend dates of warranty period, descriptions of what is and isn't covered and contact information for warranty claims (if different from contact list described above). iii. Provide information of an operations or maintenance nature covering warranty items that have not been discussed elsewhere. b. Product Information. 1. Provide manufacturers' standard, published product literature describing covered materials, equipment and devices including illustrations, exploded views, dimensions, weights, application data, etc. ii. Where manufacturer's product information (catalog cut -sheets, etc.) contain data pertaining to parts, equipment or options other than those specifically provided for this project, the contractor shall clearly indicate the specific products, model numbers, and options provided. Mark-ups made by the contractor for this purpose shall be made in a manner that will clearly photocopy (no highlighters). iii. Provide manufacturer's standard, published Installation, Operation & Maintenance bulletins pertaining to the specific equipment installed. iv. Provide performance curves and rating data, specific to the equipment installed on the project such as fan and pump curves, chiller selection sheets, sound data, etc. V. Provide a copy of all approved shop drawings covering approval of equipment for the project with the product information. Include all data concerning changes made during construction. C. Preventive Maintenance Procedures & Schedules i. Provide written preventive maintenance procedures describing each required PM task. Procedures shall include lists of tools and parts required and all safety precautions to be taken. H. State, preferably in tabular form, the recommended frequency for each preventive maintenance task (cleaning, inspection, lubrication, scheduled overhauls, etc.). Task schedules shall be grouped and sorted by frequency (daily, weekly, quarterly, annually, etc.) iii. Procedures for lubrication of equipment shall indicate both the type and quantity of lubricant to be used. iv. If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning, or other reasons, indicate the items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria. Examples of equipment requiring inspections includes, but is not limited to, the following: • Motors GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-19 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 • Controls • Filters • Heat exchangers V. Provide instruction for the proper handling, disposal and/or removal of hazardous or otherwise special materials such as used filters, refrigerant, oils, chemicals, etc. vi. Provide instruction for minor repairs or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines. Minor repair and adjustment shall be limited to repairs and adjustments that may be performed without special tools or test equipment and that require no special training or skills. Identify test points and give values for each. d. Corrective Maintenance Procedures i. Corrective Maintenance. Corrective maintenance instructions shall be predicated upon a logical effect -to -cause troubleshooting philosophy and a rapid replacement procedure to minimize equipment downtime. Instructions and data shall appear in the normal sequence of corrective maintenance, for example, troubleshooting first, repair and replacement of parts second, and then the parts list. ii. Troubleshootinc. This information shall describe the general procedure for locating malfunctions and shall give, in detail, any specific remedial procedures or techniques. The data shown are intended to isolate only the most common equipment deficiencies. Troubleshooting tables, charts, or diagrams may be used to present specific procedures. A guide to this type shall be a three -column chart. The columns shall be entitled Malfunction, Probable Cause, and Recommended Action. The information shall be alphabetically arranged by component, and each component shall, in turn, list deficiencies that may be expected. Each deficiency shall contain one or more problems with a recommended correction. iii. Repair and Replacement. Indicate the repair and replacement procedures most likely to be required in the maintenance of the systems and equipment. Information included here shall consist of step-by-step instructions for repair and replacement of defective items. Include all information required to accomplish repair or replacement, including information such as torque values. Identify all tools, special equipment, and materials that may be required. Identify uses for maintenance equipment. The paragraphs shall contain headings to identify the topics covered. e. Spare Parts Lists. i. Provide a list of all spare parts for the covered equipment. The parts list shall include a tabulation of descriptive data for each part including part number and manufacturer. Where available, provide an exploded diagram of the equipment identifying parts listed in the spare parts list. ii. Provide a list of recommended spare parts to be kept in inventory by the Owner's maintenance staff for performance of preventive maintenance and typical corrective maintenance tasks. f. System Descriptions: I. Provide a typewritten narrative describing, in general terms, the covered equipment / system. Topics to be covered in this narrative shall include theory of operation, overall system layout, description of major components, interconnections with utilities and other systems, description of control system layout and operation, identification of unusual features or functions, and major safety precautions. This information should correlate with information provided in the manufacturers' standard published literature. ii. Provide the following data (if not already being provided under the other requirements in this specification): • Detailed illustrations and schematic diagrams of each system showing major components, piping, valves, controls, utility connections, and other components, where applicable. • Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each component. • Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each component. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-20 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 • Control sequences describing start-up, all modes of operation, and shut down. • Corrected shop drawings • Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports (where applicable) g. Operating Instructions: i. Provide condensed, typewritten, instructions for operation of the covered system / equipment. Where more than one (1) common unit is installed, one set of instructions is adequate. The instructions shall provide procedures for: • Starting up the equipment/system. • Shutting down the equipmenUsystem. • Normal operating procedures. • Procedures for operating the equipment / system in emergency or unusual conditions. • Safety precautions. • Procedures for both short-term and long-term equipment lay-up. • Other pertinent data applicable to the operation of particular systems or equipment. • The instructions shall be suitable for posting adjacent to the equipment concerned. h. Factory Test Reports i. Provide copies of factory test reports specified in the covered section of the specifications. it. Test reports should include a brief description of the test procedures used, test date, names of personnel performing test, names of personnel witnessing test (if any), test results and comparison of test results with specified acceptance criteria. I. Field Test Reports I. Provide copies of field test reports specified in the covered section of the specifications. Samples of field testing include, but are not limited to, leak testing of piping and ductwork and megger testing of electrical distribution systems. ii. Test reports shall clearly indicate the type of test performed, test procedures used, system being tested, section or area of equipment being tested, date of test, signatures of personnel performing and witnessing the test, test results and comparison of test results with specified acceptance criteria. j. Posted Operating Instructions and Diagrams: i. Operating Instructions: • Where specified, copies of operating instructions shall be posted in the near vicinity of each piece of applicable equipment. The instructions shall be mounted neatly in frames under Plexiglas, where they can be easily read by operating personnel. Instructions mounted outdoors shall be suitably protected from weather. • Coordinate with owner regarding size and location of posted operating instructions k. Systems Diagrams: i. Simplified one -line diagrams of HVAC heating, cooling, and airflow systems shall be developed and posted neatly under Plexiglas in the main or most appropriate equipment room for easy reference by operating and maintenance personnel. it. These drawings shall be done in a professional manner, which is acceptable to the Owner's Facility Management staff. The diagrams shall show each component including all valves installed in the system, with name and identifying number. If space does not permit valve numbers on the diagrams, valve charts shall be provided. Explanatory notes, where needed, shall be provided. it!. Coordinate with owner regarding locations of posted operating instructions. iv. These diagrams shall be suitable for reduction in size and use in the operating manual system descriptions previously covered. 3.9 Operator Training GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-21 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel A. General PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. The Contractor shall train Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of systems and equipment listed in this Section and as mentioned in other sections. Where applicable, contractors shall coordinate with the Commissioning Team for developing the hours of instruction and scope of material to be covered. Training of Owner's personnel shall not begin until Owner has approved the final submittal copy of the operation and maintenance manuals and training programs, and the building systems and equipment are complete and operational. 2. Schedule Submittal. The proposed scope of training, training materials and instruction schedule shall be submitted for review and approval approximately 30 days before the scheduled completion of the work for which training is to occur. Mutually agreeable dates for training shall be arranged with Owner, but the training shall be completed before the Final Operational Test. Training shall not begin until the Contractor's proposed training plan and schedule have been approved by the owner. 3. The required training/demonstration indicated in the technical sections of the specifications is supplemental or in addition to the training required in this Section (where not a duplication). B. Coordinated Effort 1. The Contractor or Contractor provided professional training firm shall work closely with Owner's personnel in the development and implementation of the training program. This includes preliminary meetings to map out the direction the training will take and development, with Owner's approval, of the written training materials. 2. The Commissioning Team will provide sample training session guidelines and agendas for use by the Contractors in developing their training programs where applicable. C. Scope of Training 1. Training must include both classroom and on-the-job (hands-on) instruction by qualified manufacturer's representatives, vendors, installation/service technicians and operation personnel having the necessary knowledge, experience, and teaching skills. 2. Training sessions shall provide comprehensive instruction on the operation and maintenance of building components, equipment, controls, and systems including procedures for startup, shutdown, normal operation, abnormal operation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and corrective maintenance. 3. The classroom portion of each training session shall be based on the information contained in the approved 0&M Manuals and will use copies of these manuals for reference. This shall include the following items as applicable: a. Content and organization of appropriate O&M Manual materials b. Overall equipment/ system layout and configuration c. Locations and tag numbers of major components d. Theory of Operation / Design Intent e. Startup and Shutdown Procedures f. Normal Operating Procedures g. Non -normal Operating Procedures (unoccupied, seasonal operation, etc.) h. Emergency procedures I. Health and Safety issues (both to O&M personnel and Building occupants) I. Energy Efficiency Issues ii. Occupant Comfort and IAQ Issues iii. Control System Sequence of Operation iv. Preventive Maintenance Procedures V. Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Procedures vi. Corrective Maintenance & Repair Procedures GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-22 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 4. The field portion of each training session shall at a minimum cover the following items as applicable: a. Walk -down of covered equipment and systems b. Demonstration of startup, shutdown and operating procedures C. Demonstration of diagnostic, service, maintenance and repair procedures 5. All training sessions will be videotaped by the contractor and one (1) copy of the recording provided to Owner at the conclusion of the training session. Format for submitted video recording (DVD, other) shall be determined by Owner. 6. Follow-up or post -occupancy training, where specified, shall be planned, scheduled and conducted per the requirements of this specification. This training will focus on seasonal issues that could not be addressed during the initial training and on addressing operational and maintenance issues identified by the Owner since turnover. D. Responsibility of Training 1. The Contractor provided training will be directed at a group of Owner's personnel who will act as a training cadre. 2. The Contractor is responsible for providing training to this cadre in all systems and equipment needed to operate and maintain the Facility. 3. This cadre will then be responsible for training other personnel assigned to the Facility E. Level of Expertise of Instructors 1. Contractor may use professional training firms. 2. Credentials of training instructors are subject to review and approval by Owner. a. Instructors must have knowledge and experience with the equipment on which they are providing training. b. Instructors must be familiar with the organization and content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the equipment on which they are providing training. C. Instructors for controls must be knowledgeable and familiar with the specific controls equipment, project applications, and specific sequences of operation for this project. F. Training Programs and Materials 1. The training program, in its entirety, shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall become the property of Owner. This includes but is not limited to: a. All lesson plans, teachers' guides or training aids used to instruct the students. One complete set shall be given to Owner. b. All written materials (e.g. workbooks, manufacturers' instructions, brochures, student tests, charts or other printed or photographed visual aids). Three (3) sets with one complete reproducible master shall be given to Owner. c. All audio visual materials (e.g. DVDs, software files of presentations, or other audio visual medium). Three (3) sets shall be given to Owner. 2. The Contractor shall provide all equipment related to the conveyance of the training program e.g. DVD players, TV monitors, projectors or other related equipment, non -permanent mounted white boards, cork board and projector screens. Equipment of this nature provided by the contractors for use during training sessions does NOT become the property of Owner. Contractors shall promptly remove said equipment at the end of the training session(s). G. Classroom Training 1. Locations for classroom training sessions shall be coordinated with Owner. All training shall be conducted on-site except by prior arrangement and approval by Owner. 2. Classroom space provided by the contractors for off-site training shall meet the following requirements: a. The classroom shall be free of exterior visual and noise interference. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 0 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-23 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 b. The classroom shall be lighted and climate controlled with ventilation, air conditioning and heating. c. The classroom shall be lockable with secure or patrolled parking adjacent to the building. d. Restroom and drinking water facilities shall be on the premises and food services nearby or provided on site. e. The classroom shall facilitate the training of thirty (30) students. Tables, chairs and storage of audio-visual equipment and class written materials shall be provided. 3. Any pre -approved off-site training shall include transportation, lodging and meals as appropriate. H. Time Period of Training 1. The minimum specific hours of training time provided for each category of major equipment and systems shall be in accordance with the specification sections pertaining to this equipment or systems. 2. OWNER retains the option of redistributing training time, subject to the total time specified. This may include repetition of selected training sessions or provision for follow-up training sessions after occupancy. 3. Training must be presented on an 8 -hour per day, 5 -day per week schedule, with all reading assignments and review to be within this period. (Note: eight (8) hour training days include 1/2 hour lunch and travel time.) 4. Specific schedules for all training sessions must be coordinated in advance with Owner. END OF SECTION 0191 13 928.1 Cx Spec 019113 042117 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS © 2017, E Cube, Inc. 019113-24 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner -occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Furnishings \ Equipment. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAUELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. e. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. f. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power - driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. B. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA -approved landfill. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 033053 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready -Mix -Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 , unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. 'Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." C. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301 . 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1 -1/2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE 033053-1 CONCRETE BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal -Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301 , as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301 . Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 . 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE 033053-2 CONCRETE BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 . C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch . Apply to concrete surfaces or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or derbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. C. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE 033053-3 CONCRETE BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 3.9 REPAIRS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 033053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE 0330534 CONCRETE BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/131.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.8 COORDINATION PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. C. 2.3 A. B. METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. FERROUS METALS Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubes: ASTM A 500 Grade B (46 ksi) Zinc -Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741. FASTENERS Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 and, where indicated, flat washers. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. C. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 . V 2.4 A. B. 2.5 A. B. Lag Screws: ASME 818.2.1 . MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing; lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. FABRICATION, GENERAL Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches , with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. 2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Shop prime steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Do not weld in ceiling space of the Morgan Theater. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel tube handrails and guards attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 2. Steel tube handrails and guards attached to other adjacent materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 2. Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteda indicated. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). Spacing to leave <4" clear. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1055213-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other fors of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Fittings and brackets. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS 131.101.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. C. Other local fabricators meeting the specification requirements. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). Size to match that specified in 1. Rails and Posts: 1 -1/2 -inch diameter top and bottom rails and 1/1/2 inch diameter posts. 2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1 -1/2 -inch diameter intermediate rails spaced less than 4 (100 -mm) inches clear. 3. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1055213-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET j May 31, 2017 B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. D. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (Al) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. D. Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic -controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Water -Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1055213-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. J. Form changes in direction as follows: By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush -resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1055213-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Phosphatize. C. Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. Calor and Gloss: Match campus standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip -joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1055213-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core -drill holes not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) buildup, sloped away from post. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 2. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1 -1/2 - inch (38 -mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel -framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-7 : j BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire -retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.5 LEED Submittals: A. Certificates for Credit MR 6 Credit MR 7: Chain -of -custody certificates indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. B. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." D. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Section 061053 - Page 1 CARPENTRY BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite -wood products, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers:" 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSO Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry - lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Section 061053 - Page 2 CARPENTRY BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire -retardant - treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing. 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Section 061053 - Page 3 CARPENTRY BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 5. Grounds. B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AFBPA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. G. Comply with AW PA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two -Family Dwellings. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Section 061053 - Page 4 CARPENTRY BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1 -by -3 -inch nominal -size furring horizontally at 24 inches o.c. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Section 061053 - Page 5 CARPENTRY BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.3 1.4 1. Plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet — installation. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Energy and Environmental Submittals: 1. Product Data for adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products contain no urea formaldehyde. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic -laminate cabinets. 3. Apply AW I Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. D. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel E. Samples for Verification: PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Wood -grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm), for each type, pattern and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 3. Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. High-pressure decorative laminate. 4. Glass. 5. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AW I's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical plastic -laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic -laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Flush overlay. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGP. 4. Edges: Grade VGS. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Grade VGS. High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 a. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: 3 mm PVC T -mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. C. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Hardwood plywood panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic -Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirement: See Architect's Finish Legend. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium -density overlay. 4. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP -1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. C. Shelves: All shelves less than 33" wide shall be 3/4" thick. All shelves over 33" wide shall be 1" thick. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMAAl56.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self- closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 D. Catches: Push -in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, 804071; with shelf rests, 804081. F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, 804013; metal, two -pin type with shelf hold-down clip. G. Drawer Slides: BHMAA156.9. 1. Manufacturer: Acuride. 2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc -plated -steel ball- bearing slides. 3. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1 HD -100. 5. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-200. 6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1 HD -100. H. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063. I. Door Locks: Allegion CL Series with interchangeable core J. Drawer Locks: Allegion CL Series with interchangeable core. K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMAA156.16,L03011. L. Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q3, 6.0 mm thick. M. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated. N. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. See Architect's Finish Legend. O. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. D. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for not less than 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 G. Provide two keyways, one set comprising rooms 107, 107A, and one set for all remaining spaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS '064116 - 7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic sheet paneling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS - A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat -finished, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Crane Comoosites. Inc. b. Marlite. C. Parkland Plastics, Inc. PLASTIC PANELING Section 066400 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 4. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.12 inch . 5. Surface Finish: Smooth. 6. Color: White. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside comers, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: White. B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory -laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Sealant: Mildew -resistant, single -component, neutral -curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. PLASTIC PANELING Section 066400 - Page 2 BYLI-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. 3. Apply sealant to bottom edge at joint to flooring. D. Install factory -laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside comer trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings; and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 PLASTIC PANELING Section 066400 - Page 3 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION TIPS: To view non -printing Editor's Notes that provide guidance for editing, click on Masterworks/Single-File Format- ting/Toggle/Editor's Notes. To read detailed research, technical information about products and materials, and coordination checklists, click on Masterworks/Supporting Information. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mineral -wool blanket. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For foam -plastic insulation, from ICC -ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam -plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. THERMAL INSULATION 072100-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam -plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam -plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL -WOOL BLANKETS A. Mineral -Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Use as wall insulation. B. Mineral -Wool Blanket, Reinforced -Foil Faced: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame -spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil -scrim kraft, or foil -scrim polyethylene. Use as insulation at underside of roof deck. 2.2 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. 2. Spindle: Copper -coated, low -carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. B. Adhesively Attached, Angle -Shaped, Spindle -Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Angle: Formed from 0.030 -inch- (0.762 -mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square. 3. Spindle: Copper -coated, low -carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type ll, closed cell, with maximum flame - spread and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respecfively, per ASTM E 84. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. THERMAL INSULATION 072100-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION I 3.2 A. B. C. D. 3.3 A. 3.4 Q A. PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R -value. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3 -inch (76 -mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2435 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. Vapor -Retarder -Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor -retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. PROTECTION Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow -metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project - site storage. Do not use non -vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4 -inch -high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 1. Ceco Door: ASSA ABLOY. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-1 FRAMES BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Curries Comoanv: ASSA ABLOY. 3. Steelcraft: an Ingersoll-Rand brand. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow -metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings[ and temperature -rise limits] indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. b. Face: Uncoated, cold -rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch (0.8 mm). C. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. d. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch . b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-2 FRAMES BYIJ-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow - metal frames of type indicated. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches , as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire -protection ratings indicated. C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow - metal work for hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113.3 FRAMES BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form comers of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow -metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-4 FRAMES BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been property set and secured. C. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. d. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured atjambs at floor C. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-5 FRAMES BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory -finishing specifications. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory -finished doors. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 -inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. i 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. I 4. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 5. Warranty Period for Hollow -Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. f PART 2 -PRODUCTS i 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Graham Wood Doors: ASSA ABLOY Grouo comoanv. I 2. Marshfield DoorSvstems. Inc;. 3. VT Industries Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. Structural -Composite -Lumber -Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 Ibf . 2.3 VENEER -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: White Oak. (Match to existing doors). FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor -door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more. 8. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 9. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same flitches as adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with wood paneling. Comply with requirements in Section 064216 "Flush Wood Paneling." 10. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge Type A. 11. Core: Structural composite lumber. 12. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 13. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. Fabricate door and transom panels with full -width, solid -lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory -installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. D. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. E. Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Transparent Finish: Grade: Premium. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 2. Finish: Match to existing doors. 3. Sheen: Match to existing doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. D. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-4 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11W00001 lulu a A. This Section includes the following: Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" 2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" 3. Division 08 Section "Sectional Door" for door hardware. 4. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low -voltage wiring work. 5. Division 28 Section "Access Control' for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security access system. 6. Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for detection devices installed at door openings and provided as part of an intrusion detection system. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. C. Riser diagram. DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 1 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 d. Elevation of each door. 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control, security, building control system. 3. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware. C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets, if requested. 1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches, and closers as requested. F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. H. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. 2. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. b. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. C. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. d. Fastenings and other pertinent information. e. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. f Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. Door and frame sizes and materials. i. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 3. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. 3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's Security Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys. F. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner's Representative by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Electrical System Roughing -in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security system, and building control system. D. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel Im 1.9 PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Exit Devices: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: Thirty (30) years from date of Substantial Completion. MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six (6) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Door Hardware: a. 1 ea. VD XP -98L X 626. b. 2 ea. SCH ND73RD X 626. c. 2 ea. LCN 4040XP HEDA 689. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Products: a. Finish: Shall be US261), unless otherwise noted. b. Manufacture Standard: 1) Butts: Ives, Basis of Design 2) Locksets: Schlage, Owner's standard, No substitute DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3) Access Control Locksets: Schlage Electronics Owner's standard, No substitute 4) Closers: LCN, Owner's standard, No substitute 5) Exit Devices: Von Duprin, Owner's standard, No substitute 6) Trim: Ives, Basis of Design 7) Weatherstrip: Zero, Basis of Design 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A156.1. b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2. C. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3. d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI A156.4. e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. f Architectural Door Trim: ANSI A156.6. g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.7. h. Door Controls -Overhead Holders: ANSI A156.8. i. Materials and Finishes: ANSI A156.18. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel 2.4 2.5 PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thin -bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. HINGES, GENERAL A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units. C. Hinge Weight: As indicated in hardware sets. D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Steel with steel pin. E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1. Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf. 2. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging doors. 3. Corners: Square. F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded -to -the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors. CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Hinges shall be a geared continuous hinge utilizing a single gear section for the door leaf and a separate gear section for the frame side of the door. The door leaf and jamb leaf shall fully mortised where scheduled, and full surface where scheduled.. Geared hinges are to be certified to ANSI 156.25, Grade 2 and UL l OC tested and approved for 90 minutes. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-7 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8 -inch (16 -mm) minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. D. Provide cylindrical locks exceeding the ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Grade 1 performance standards for strength, security & durability in the categories below: 1. Abusive locked lever torque — minimum 3,100 inch -pounds without gaining access 2. Offset lever pull - minimum 1,600 foot pounds without gaining access Simulates pry -bar attacks 3. Vertical lever impact - minimum 100 impacts without gaining access Simulates sledgehammer -blows to trim, very aggressive abuse 4. Cycle life - minimum 16 million cycles Cycle life speaks to robustness of lock, ensuring operation after l OM cycles (BHMA requirement is 1M). a. With no visible lever sag Working after 15M cycles is not the same as working well. No droop and wobble means the lock still works like new after the test. b. Without the use of performance aids (i.e. set screws, spacers, etc.) Set screws and spacers are a poor fix for droop and wobble. Both add to installation complexity, and set screws can be tamper targets. 5. Door Prep: Provide lockset to install using a standard ANSI 161 door preparation. 6. Anti -Rotation Plate: Provide lockset with a mechanically interlocked anti -rotation plate. Anti -Rotation teeth or "bite tabs" are not acceptable. Locks without any rotation prevention devices are not acceptable. 7. Lever Return Springs: Provide each lever with two compression type return springs that are easily accessible without dismantling the lock chassis. Locks utilizing tension or torsion lever return springs are unacceptable. Locks with internal springs that require dismantling the lock chassis are unacceptable. 8. Lever Spindles: Provide lock with either milled or I -piece deep drawn spindles. 2 -piece interlocking stamped spindles are not acceptable. 9. Multi -Functionality: Provide modular lockset with capability to convert to a new lock function by changing key cams. 10. Vandal Resistant Lever: Where scheduled, provide lockset with lever that freely rotates even when locked to resist vandalism and abuse. 2.7 ACCESS CONTRL LOCKSETS A. Hardwired and Wireless Electronic Locksets Bored type locksets to be non -handed, heavy-duty cylindrical type, with 2 3/4" backset, as specified, with '/a inch throw latchbolt with % inch throw available. Chassis to accommodate standard 161 cylindrical lock prep for 13/4" doors standard; with 13/8" to 2 3/4" thick doors in 1/8" increments. Backset to be 2 3/4" standard, with 2 3/8", 3 %" and 5" backset optional. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-8 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Lockset to meet or exceed ANSI Standard A156.25 and A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 strength and operational requirements. 3. Lockset listed to UL294. 4. Lockset to meet or exceed ANSI/BHMA A156.25 Grade 1 Operation and Security Requirement. 5. Trim shall meet or exceed ANSI Standard A156.25 and A156.2, Grade 1 strength and operational requirements. UL294*, UL10C, Fcc Part 15, ADA, RoHS. 6. Lockset certified to UL10C, FCC Partl5, Florida Building Code Standards TAS 201 large missile impact, TAS 202 and TAS 203. Lockset shall be compliant with ICC / ANSI A117.1, NFPA 101, NFPA 80, and Industry Canada RSS-210. 7. Exterior lever to be designed with ability to rotate freely while door remains securely locked, preventing damage to internal lock components from vandalism by excessive force. 8. Lever trim to be non -handed, and to operate independently of non-locking levers for extended life cycles. 9. 5,000 users and audits with less than I second credential verification time. 10. Tri -colored LED's and audible indicators that are field configurable. 11. Exterior operating temperature range -31 degrees to 151 degrees. Interior operating temperature range 32 degrees to 120 degrees. 12. Standard features to include: Lock/unlock status. Request to Exit switch, Mechanical Key Overide, Battery Status. Optional features to include: Deadbolt position, Request to Enter, Interior Cover Tamper Guard. 13. Panel Interface Board (PIB) communication range up to 4000 feet with wiegand or clock and data up to 500 feet; PIB to Access Control Panel (ACP). 12VDC or 24VDC up to 250mA. 22AWG, 8 conductor shielded Alpha 1298C or equivalent. Meets NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 6. 14. Furnish locks with following functions which will be field configurable without taking the lock off the door: a. Classroom / Storeroom 70. b. Apartment 60. C. Office 50. d. Privacy 40. 15. Lever style: Rhodes 16. Lock will have the ability to utilize emergency mechanical key override with multiple manufacturer's key systems in the lever. 2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide a Primus/Everst master, grandmaster or great -grandmaster integrated with Owner's existing system. If key pinning charts are required, owner to furnish charts to hardware supplier. C. Furnish temporary keyed cores for the construction period, and remove these when directed. The construction cores remain property of the supplier and shall be returned to the supplier when they are removed. Contractor shall install the permanent cores in the presence of the owner's representative. In E. 2.9 A. 2.10 Key Cylinders: Large format interchangeable core, utility patented, 7 -pin solid brass construction. Permanent Keys: Secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner's Representative I. For estimate: 2 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand -master keys, 3 control keys. PUSH/PULL UNITS Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru- bolted. CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural Transportations Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." I. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -fire -rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)• B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 151bf to open door to minimum required width. C. Cylinder: Shall be of high strength cast iron construction. All door exterior closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles for all exterior door closers must be provided. Cylinder shall have been manufactured and in the marketplace for a minimum of 10 years D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 10 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4 Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring. 2. XL cylinder body to have 1'h" piston diameter with %" journal double heat treated shaft, (.1421" teeth thickness,) 5/8" full complement bearings, chrome silicon steel spring. 3. Cylinder body to have "FAST" power adjust speed dial to show spring size power. 4. Closers to have forged steel main arm and forearm for REG, EDA and CUSH type arms 5. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date -of -manufacture code. 6. Independent lab -tested 10,000,000 cycles. 7. Thru-bolts at wood doors unless doors are provided with closer blocking. Non -sized, non -handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms. 8. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. 9. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 Ib., interior doors 5 lb., labeled fire doors 15 lb. 10. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled. 11. Extra -duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 12. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, famish data on request. 13. Non -flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 14. Pressure relief values are not allowed. 2.11 EXIT DEVICES/PANIC HARDWARE A. General features: BHMA Al 56.3, Grade 1. B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural Transportations Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 151bf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool of special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to AHJ for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. 1. Independent lab -tested 10,000,000 cycles. 2. Push -through touch pad design. No exposed touch bar fasteners, no exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti -rattle devices. 3. No exposed screws to show through glass doors. 4. Non -handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-11 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel E. Specific features: PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Non -Fire Rated Devices: As scheduled in hardware sets. 2. Lever Trim: Vandal resistant, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130" thickness, match lockset lever design. 3. Furnish all exit devices with deadlocking latchbolts. 4. End caps shall be sloped and of heavy-duty metal alloy construction and provide horizontal adjustment to provide flush alignment with device cover plate. When device end cap is installed, no raised edges will protrude. End cap shall be cast metal or forged aluminum and have a minimum thickness of (.250"). Plastic or metal stamping will not be acceptable. 5. Provide all shim kits and filler plates to allow flush mounting of exit devices on all types of doors used in this project. 2.12 TRIM AND STOPS A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 10" high, mop plates to be 5" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. C. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall stops are preferred. Floor stops are used only where noted in hardware schedule. Where conditions prohibit the use wall type stops, furnish overhead stops either surface mounted or concealed as noted in hardware sets. 2.13 A. 2.14 A. 2.15 Im WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. THRESHOLDS General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled. ELECTRICAL HARDWARE Furnish wiring diagrams to electrical contractor for use in installing electrical hardware products. B. Electrical contractor to run all wiring and make all final connections for electrified hardware. Hardware supplier shall be responsible to furnish all wiring diagrams to operate electrified hardware. Access control material and electrified hardware to interface at junction boxes. DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 12 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel 2.16 HARDWARE FINISHES PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI At 15 Series. 1. Surface -Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI At 15-W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Pre -installation conference shall be conducted prior to installation of hardware at Project site. Meet with the, Owner, Contractor, installer, and manufacturers representatives. A separate pre- installation conference shall be conducted prior to the installation of electronic security hardware with the electrical contractor Review catalogs, brochures, templates, installation instructions, and the approved hardware schedule. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions, as to ensure correct technique of installation, and coordination with other work. Notify participants at least ten, 10 working days before conference. DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 13 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Hardware Installers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in installation of hardware. Provide verification of installer's qualification to Consultant for approval. All installers to attend review meetings with the hardware distributor. C. Install hardware using only manufacturer supplied and approved fasteners in strict adherence with manufacturers published installation instructions. D. Install head seal prior to installation of "PA" -parallel arm mounted door closers and push side mounted door stops/holders. Trim, cut and notch thresholds and saddles neatly to minimally fit the profile of the door frame. Install thresholds and saddles in a bed of caulking completely sealing the underside from water and air penetration. E. Counter sink through bolt of door pull under push plate during installation. F. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated, as follows, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." G. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 nun) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 14 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The following schedule of hardware sets shall be considered a guide and the supplier is cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the full requirements of this section. It shall be the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required hardware. B. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and are required for completion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, conflict, or other discrepancy shall be sent to the Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids, for clarification by addendum. C. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions or items of hardware not clarified prior to bid opening. HW SET NO: 01 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 204C 210C HARDWARE BY DOOR MFG B/O HW SET NO: 02 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 105B 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 15 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel 1 EA POWER TRANSFER 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM 1 EA LOCK I EA FSIC CORE 1 EA COORDINATOR 2 E MOUNTING 1 EA BRACKET 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 2 EA CUSH SHOE GY SUPPORT 2 EA KICK PLATE 1 EA SECURITY ASTRAGAL 2 EA SILENCER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PANEL INTERFACE EPT10 FB41P DPI AD-300-CY-70-MTK-RHO-TD (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) 23-030 EV 29 COR X FL MB 4040XP SCUSH MC 4040-30 8400 10" X 2" LDW 134E 43SP (ACTIVE LEAF, PULL SIDE) SR64 BY DIV 28 (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) BY DIV 28 (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) HW SET NO: 03 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 105C 3 EA HINGE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM N 626 LOCK 1 EA FSIC CORE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER IEA CUSHSHOE 689 SUPPORT 1 EA KICK PLATE 3 EA SILENCER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PANEL INTERFACE 5BB 14.5 X 4.5 NRP EPT10 AD-300-CY-70-MTK-RHO-TD (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) 23-030 EV 29 4040XP SCUSH MC 4040-30 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E SR64 BY DIV 28 (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) BY DIV 28 (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 689 VON 630 IVE 626 IVE N 626 SCE 626 SCH 628 IVE 689 IVE 689 LCN 689 LCN 630 IVE ZER GY IVE N B/O N B/O 652 IVE 689 VON N 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN 689 LCN 630 IVE GY IVE B/O N B/O .CARD IN. USER PRESENTS CREDENTIAL, LEVER RELEASES, USER OPENS DOOR TO ENTER. READER DOOR POSITION INDICATOR AND REQUEST TO EXIT IS INTEGRAL TO THE LOCK. VOLTAGE DRAW ON AD LOCK IS .6 AMPS @ 24V. 18/2 PLENUM REQUIRED FOR POWER AND 20/2C OVERALL SHIELD PLENUM CABLE FOR RS485 COMMUNICATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100-16 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 HW SET NO: 04 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 163 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM AD-300-CY-70-MTK-RHO-TD N 626 SCE 1 EA LOCK (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) 689 LCN 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EV 29 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH MC 689 LCN 2 EA CUSH SHOE 4040-30 689 LCN SUPPORT IEA KICK PLATE 840010" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY BY DIV 28 N B/O (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) PANEL INTERFACE BY DIV 28 B/O (BY SECURITY INTEGRATOR) CARD IN. USER PRESENTS CREDENTIAL, LEVER RELEASES, USER OPENS DOOR TO ENTER. READER DOOR POSITION INDICATOR AND REQUEST TO EXIT IS INTEGRAL TO THE LOCK. VOLTAGE DRAW ON AD LOCK IS .6 AMPS @ 24V. 18/2 PLENUM REQUIRED FOR POWER AND 20/2C OVERALL SHIELD PLENUM CABLE FOR RS485 COMMUNICATION. HW SET NO: 05 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 123 123A 3 EA HINGE 5BB 14.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 6" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8305 10" 6" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE HW SET NO: 06 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 110 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70JD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EV 29 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE DOOR HARDWARE 087100-17 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 HW SET NO: 07 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 208A 208B 3 EA HW HINGE 51313 1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70JD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EV 29 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE HW SET NO: 08 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 117 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CORRIDOR LOCK ND73JD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EV 29 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 rVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE HW SET NO: 09 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 127 128 3 EA HINGE I EA CORRIDOR LOCK 1 EA FSIC CORE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER IEA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 1 EA KICK PLATE 1 EA WALL STOP 3 EA SILENCER 5BB 14.5 X 4.5 NRP ND73JD RHO 23-030 EV 29 4040XP HCUSH MC 4040-30 8400 10" X 2" LDW 134E WS406/407CCV SR64 HW SET NO: 10 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 122 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH MTLP LCN C 689 LCN 630 IVE 630 IVE GY IVE 652 IVE DOOR HARDWARE 087100-18 BYU Idaho Austin Bldg Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80JD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EV 29 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE HW SET NO: 11 DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors) 202A 202B 204A 204B 206A 206B 210A 210B 212A 212B 213A 213B 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD -98-L-06 626 VON I EA MORTISE CYL TURN 09-900118 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC RIM CYL 20-079 626 SCH HOUSING 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EV 29 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HCUSH MC MTLP LCN C 1 EA CUSH SHOE 4040-30 689 LCN SUPPORT IEA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 19 I 6 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 1.4 A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants and colored spacers, in 12 -inch (300 -mm) lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. GLAZING 088000-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installers and manufacturers of insulating -glass units with sputter -coated, low -e coatings and glass testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36 -month period. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating -Glass Units with Sputter -Coated, Low -E Coatings: A qualified insulating -glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated -glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass, tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use" H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. GLAZING 088000-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating - glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. WarrantyPeriod: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where Float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: GLAZING 088000 -3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U -Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 4. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality -Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Extra -clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality -Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent and solar heat gain coefficient not less than 0.87. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire or Architect approved equal. C. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality -Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). D. Decorative Glass (frosted): Use glazing films at locations shown on the drawings. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation: 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones: SIIPruf LM SCS2700. C. May National Associates, Inc.: Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation: 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division: SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated: Soectrem 1. 2. Applications: See drawings. GLAZING 088000-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass liter in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and comers. 2.7 MONOLITHIC -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type for interior door lites: Clear float glass, heat -strengthened float glass and fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling at fully tempered units. GLAZING 088000-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead or as per manufacturer's recommendations. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. GLAZING 088000-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. C. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. GLAZING 088000-7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000-8 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION - 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non -load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216-1 FRAMING BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch -deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216-2 FRAMING BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two 18 ga. studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 4. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: - Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216-3 FRAMING I I BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels Flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD j A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.3 2.4 2.5 1. American Gvosum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafar-ge North America Inc. 5. National Gvosum Company. 6. PABCO Gvosum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L -Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U -Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved -Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC: BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products: Acoustical Sealant GSC C. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR. d. Snecified Technologies. Inc • Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation: SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to 9.5 -mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings and ceiling surfaces. 3. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Glass -Mat Interior Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L -Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U -Bead: Use where indicated. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." GYPSUM BOARD 092900-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings and areas to receive gloss finish, if any. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension -System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension -System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold -Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 4. Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1095113-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension -system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Glass -Fiber -Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis -of -Design Product for Food Areas (C2): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Health Zone" or comparable product by one of the following: 1. USG Interiors, Inc.: Subsidiary of USG Corooration. a. Color: White b. NRC: Not less than 0.55 C. CAC: 35 d. Light Reflectance: .79 e. Clean Room Classification: 100 f. Surface Finish: Film Laminate g. Edge/Joint Detail: Square, sized to fit flange of exposed suspension -system members. h. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). L Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. j. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram -positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. B. Basis -of -Design Product for Classrooms (Cl) Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Ultima" or comparable product by one of the following: USG Interiors. Inc.: Subsidiary of USG Corooration a. Color: White b. NRC: Not less than 0.70 C. CAC: 35 d. Light Reflectance: .86 e. Edge/Joint Detail: Square, sized to fit flange of exposed suspension -system members. f. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). g. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. h. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram -positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. High -Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high -humidity finishes are indicated. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-3 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Post -installed expansion or Post -installed bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135 -inch - (3.5 -mm-) diameter wire. D. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. F. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place. G. Hold -Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees. H. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact -clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.: Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet; pre -painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16 -inch- (24 -mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold -rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1095113-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.: Subsidiary of USG Corooration. B. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension -system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. C. Extruded -Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded - aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following: 1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M) for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5. 2. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class Il, 0.010 mm or thicker. 3. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corooration; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthefic-rubber sealant. 3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1095113-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fire -Rated Assembly: Install fire -rated ceiling systems according to tested fire -rated design. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension -system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling -suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast - in -place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through fors into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal fors, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in- place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1095113-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension -system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension -system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension -system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal -edged panels on suspension -system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal -edged panels on suspension -system members with box -shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension -system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 6. Install hold-down and impact clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension - system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-7 �l BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Rubber Molding Accessories 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Energy and Environmental Submittals: 1. Product Data for adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for resilient stair accessories, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore standard. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. F. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1096613-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FloorSoore Compliance: Resilient base and stair accessories shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. 2.2 THERMOSET -RUBBER BASE A. Basis of Design: Forbo, or subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mannington. 2. Roppe Corporation. USA. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring & carpet. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm) or as indicated on Drawings. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Preformed. H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Forbo. (Basis of Design). 2. Roppe Corporation, USA. 3. Mannington. B. Description: Rubber transition strips. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. D. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories at all transitions from carpet to VCT. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient -product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less except that adhesive for rubber stair treads shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less. C. Stair -Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair -tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by resilient stair -tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 3.2 PREPARATION A. 2 C. D. E. 3.3 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1096513-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1096513-5 e BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes vinyl sheet flooring. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 -by -9 -inch sections of each different color and pattern of resilient sheet flooring required. 1. For heat -welding bead, manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required. C. Welded -Seam Samples: For seamless -installation technique indicated and for each resilient sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 -by -9 -inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. D. Product Schedule: For resilient sheet flooring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for resilient sheet flooring including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color and pattern in locations directed by Architect. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Section 096516 - Page 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F . Store rolls upright. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F , in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation. E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 UNBACKED VINYL SHEET FLOORING (R1, 2, 3, 4, 5.) Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, Gerflor Mipolam Symbioz: 1. Approved Equal B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1913. C. Thickness: 0.080 inch. D. Wearing Surface: Smooth. E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. F. Seamless -Installation Method: Heat welded. G. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the construction drawings. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Section 096516 - Page 2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 H. Product shall show no significant staining from the following chemicals, stains or acids 1. Amido Black Crethanol 2. Amido Black H2O 3. Basic Yellow Dye 4. RAM Stock 5. RAM Working 6. Ninhydrin 7. Indanedione 8. Sudan Black Dye 9. HCI 10. Bleach 11. Gentian Violet Dye. 12. Hungarian Red Dye 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated. C. Seamless -Installation Accessories: 1. Heat -Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid -strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: Match flooring. 2. Chemical -Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams. a. Bonding compound shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." D. Integral -Flash -Cove -Base Accessories: 1. Cove Strip: 1 -inch radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. 2. Cap Strip: Metal Cap. provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. 3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Section 096516 - Page 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing,.but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of As allowed by the manufacturer. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum As allowed by the manufacturer. percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet flooring. 3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring. B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low -traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Section 096516 - Page 4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. I. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat -Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. J. Integral -Flash -Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 4 inches. up vertical surfaces. Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet flooring. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring installation: Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). E. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Section 096516 - Page 5 G w BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, fusion -bonded carpet tile as scheduled on the drawings, including elevators K and T. All tile carpeting is Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed B. Provide and install 4" high carpet base on tile carpeting installed in this section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. C. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. TILE CARPETING 1096813-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.7 A. A. 1.9 A 1.10 A B C. D. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Installers are limited to the following: 1. Commercial Flooring Systems, 360 West 600 South, SLC, Utah, 84104. 801 355-9300, Contact Lori or Dale. 2. Comflors, Inc., 1272 West Sportsplex Drive, Kaysville, Utah, 84037. 801 444-3500. Contact Amy or Brian (cell #801 540-3424). 3. Flooring Services Inc., 2020 West Industrial Circle, SLC, Utah. 84104. 801 487-3600. Contact Jason or Marie (cell #801 631-9152). 4. Gundersen's Carpet and Vinyl, 2342 North 3000 West, Rexburg, Idaho. 83400. 208 356-4100. Contact Susan or Roy (cell #208 390-7194). DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with CRI 104, FIELD CONDITIONS Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE (Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed) A. Basis -of -Design Product: See finish legend on drawings. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Owner provided carpet tiles are tac tiles. TILE CARPETING 1096813-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile.manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet file to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. TILE CARPETING 096813-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 H. Staggerjoints of carpet tiles so carpet file grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, 'Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet the against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 1096813-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION - 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F . 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F . INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: USU Standard White. 2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: [MPI #50.] B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: [MPI #3.] C. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low OdorNOC: [MPI #149.] D. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: [MPI #17.1 2.3 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low OdorNOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): [MPI #143.1 B. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): [MPI #141.] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior[, MPI #50]. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. C. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #53]. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior[, MPI #50]. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #141]. Ceilings shall be Flat Gloss level. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Markerboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes markerboards, and tackboards. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of panel joints. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated, for units with factory - applied color finishes, and as follows: 1. Actual sections of porcelain -enamel face sheet, tackboard assembly and display rail. 2. Fabric swatches of vinyl -fabric -faced tack assemblies. 3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated. 1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 2. Trim: 6 -inch- (152 -mm-) long sections of each trim profile. 3. Display Rail: 6 -inch- (152 -mm-) long sections. 4. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory. E. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface -burning characteristics of fabrics. C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of motor -operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from single manufacturer. C. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory -built visual display surfaces, including factory -applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display surfaces by field measurements before fabrication. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain -Enamel Face Sheets: agrees to repair or replace porcelain -enamel face specified warranty period. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer Sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-2 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Porcelain -Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain -enamel coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Claridge Products and Eauipment Inc. b. PolvVision Corporation: a Steelcase comoanv. C. Equals as approved by the Architect. 2. Gloss Finish: Gloss as indicated; dry -erase markers wipe clean with dry cloth or standard eraser. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1., made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde, that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208. D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063. . E. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers:' MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Porcelain -Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory -laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021 -inch- (0.53 -mm-) thick, porcelain -enamel face sheet with low -gloss finish. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Claridge Products and Eouipment. Inc. b. PolvVision Corporation: a Steelcase company. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture -barrier backing. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture -resistant thermoplastic type. backing. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2.3 MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062 -inch- (1.57 -mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape. Factory -Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard. B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Porcelain -Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain -enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where factory -applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment. C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 1. Where factory -applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 2.7 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE A. Visual Display Board: Factory assembled. Markerboard: Porcelain -enamel markerboard assembly. a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2. Corners: Square. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting: Wall. 6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Factory] -Applied Aluminum Trim: powder -coat finish. a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 8. Accessories: a. Chalktray: Solid type. b. Map rail with display rail. B. Visual Display Rail: Factory assembled. 1. Tack Surface: Vinyl -fabric -faced tackboard assembly. a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2. Size: 2 inches (50 mm) high by length indicated on Drawings. 3. Edges: Extruded -aluminum trim. 4. Ends: Aluminum. 5. Aluminum Finish: Powder -coat to match display boards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces. C. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew. C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces and wall surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Mounting Height: As indicated on drawings or 36 inches (914 mm) above finished floor to top of chalktray if not indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY -FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND ASSEMBLIES A. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure both top and bottom of boards to walls. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VISUAL DISPLAY RAILS A. Display Rails: Install rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at height indicated below. Attach to wall surface with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 1. Mounting Height: As indicated on drawings or 60 inches (1524 mm) above finished floor to top of rail if not indicated. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to - visual display surface in each room. B. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor -operated, sliding visual display units. END OF SECTION 101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-6 BYU-Idaho-Austin Building Remodel SECTION 102238 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrically operated, vertically folding acoustical panel partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire -rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track. _ 3. Electrical and communications Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, and limit switches and for system disconnect switches. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 102238-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36 -inch- (914 -mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square. 3. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 4. Hardware: One of each exposed door -operating device. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions. Include design calculations for seismic restraints. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. C. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels. B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support -beam, mounting -hole template. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, testing agency and manufacturer. D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Include seismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in vertical position during a seismic event and the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7. 2. Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner -furnished panel facing material complies with requirements. F. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. G. Field quality -control reports. H. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1102238-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. C. Electric operator and controls. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Panel Finish -Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Cleady mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years or 5,000 cycles from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above. B. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means 'the partition panels will remain in place without separation of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified." OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1102238-3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: Sound -Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound -transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Skyfold "Classic NR" as manufactured by Railtech Ltd. and Railtech Composites Inc. B. Panel Operation: Electrically operated, continuously hinged panels with vertical operation. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. 1. Panel Width: Standard widths. E. STC: Not less than 50. F. NRC: Not less than 0.65. G. Rw: 49 H. Panel Weight: 7.5 Ib/sq. ft. maximum. I. Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches. J. Panel Materials: Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 102238-4 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 2. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension -leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel. 3. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 4. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288. 5. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 6. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 7. Plywood: DOC PS 1; made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. K. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Initial Closure: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Final Closure: Manufacturer's standard. L. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Horizontal Top Seals: Manufacturer's standard. C. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous -contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor. 2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire -test -response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew -resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with edges tightly butted, and with invisible seams complying with Shop Drawings for location, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal butted edges or seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. 2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. 3. Match facing pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finished floor. B. Marker Board: Manufacturer's standard marker board. Placed as per drawings. C. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard fabric, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains. Color/Pattern: Match Architect's samples. D. Cap -Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter -edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges of panel and finish facing, finished as follows: OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 102238-5 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Steel, Painted: Finished with manufacturer's color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Aluminum: Finished with manufacturer's standard color anodic finish. E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel -to -panel joints. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Overhead supporting hangers: Steel mounted directly to overhead structural support, with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size elements to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between supports. Provide a continuous system to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory -applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with manufacturers standard finish. B. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. C. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, corrosion -resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ELECTRIC OPERATORS A. General: Factory -assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended and provided by operable panel partition manufacturer for partition specified; with electric motor and factory -prewired motor controls, speed reducer, chain drive, control stations, control devices, and accessories required for operation. Include wiring from control stations to motor. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. B. Provide remote motor location to accommodate shallow clearances. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6. E. Motor Electrical Characteristics: 1. Horsepower: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Volts: 208 3. Phase: Three. 4. Hertz: 60. F. Control Stations: Two single -key -operated, constant -pressure control stations located remotely from each other on opposite sides and opposite ends of partition run. Wire in series to require simultaneous activation of both key stations to operate partition. Each three -position control station labeled "Open,' "Close," and "Off or Stop." Furnish two keys per station. G. Obstruction -Detection Devices: Equip each motorized operable panel partition with indicated automatic safety sensor that causes operator to immediately shut off motor. 1. Sensor Edge: Contact -pressure -sensitive safety edge along partition's bottom edge. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1102238-6 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 H. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop operable panel partition at fully extended and fully stacked positions. 2.7 ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Supplier / Installer shall take full responsibility for field verifying installation clearances during the rough in stage of construction and shall verify in writing to the contractor that the condition meets or does not meet the criteria for fitting the operable panel partition. The supplier / Installer shall be financially responsible to re -construct or repair any conditions imposed by the installer / supplier or manufacturer after such inspection if the requirements deviate from the original statement of the supplier / installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable -partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1102238-7 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102238 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 102238-8 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material backsplashes. B. Related Requirements: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16 - 1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous -filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS -1. 1. Basis of Design: :Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Formica Signatures products or comparable product by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Swan Corporation (The) B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C -C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Edge as indicated on drawings 2. Backsplash:. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash. C. Countertops: 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) thick, solid surface material. D. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. E. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field 1. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches (450 mm) of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches (900 mm) long would result, unless unavoidable. 2. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint. F. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16 - 2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. b. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. C. Provide 3/4 -inch (20 -mm) full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch (10 mm) into fixture opening. 2. Counter -Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter -mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 4. Counter -Mounted Cooktops: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for cooktops. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64 -inch (0.4 -mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into comerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16 - 3 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position. 2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 123661.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16 - 4 BYU-Idaho- Ausfln Building Remodel SECTION 144200 - WHEELCHAIR LIFTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples of exposed finishes. PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 1. Indicate loading on structure and required clearances. 2. Submit operation and maintenance data to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Warranties: Provide standard manufacturer's written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship for the period of five year(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A18.1. B. Comply with ADAAG Section 410 — Platform Lifts. 2.2 VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT A. Basis of Design: Inclinator Company of America, VL — Type A "Vertical Lift L-96" or equivalent by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Bruno Independent Living Aids, Inc. Butler Dynamics, LLC. Florlift of New Jersey, Inc. Garaventa Lift. Giant Lift Equipment Mfg. Co.. Inc. Liftavator. Inc. B. Vertical Platform Lift: 1. Platform Size: 38-1/4 inches deep by 60 inches wide by 42 inches high. 2. Door Operation and Clear Opening Width: Low-energy, power -operated doors; end door with minimum 32 -inch (815 -mm) clear opening width. 3. Rated Speed: 10 fpm. 4. Capacity: 750 lbs. 5. Emergency Operation: Provide emergency manual operation and emergency battery power system to raise or lower units. 6. Runway Enclosure: Rectangular steel -tube frame with flush steel -sheet panels. 7. Gates: Rectangular steel -tube frames glazed with clear acrylic glazing and with 12 -inch- (300 -mm- ) high, steel kick panels. 8. Platform: Galvanized -steel sheet with black rubber flooring. WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 144200-1 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 9. Platform Sides: Rectangular steel -tube frames with flush steel -sheet panels. 10. Self -Supporting Units: Support vertical loads of units only at base. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing, ASTM A 500. C. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTM A 10081A 1008M, or hot rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. D. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275), commercial quality. E. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell -cast) or Category A-2 (continuous cast), Finish 1 (smooth or polished), clear or tinted as indicated. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. 2.4 FINISH A. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two - coat, baked -on finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Enclose wiring within housings of units or building construction. Do not use conduit exposed to view in finished spaces. B. Alignment: Coordinate runway gates with platform travel and positioning, for accurate alignment and minimum clearance between platforms, runway gates, sills, and gate frames. C. Position sills accurately and fill space under sills with grout. D. Adjust stops for accurate leveling at each landing, within 1/4 inch (6 mm) up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. E. Lubricate operating parts, including drive mechanism, guide rails, gates, safety devices, and hardware. F. On completion of lift installation and before permitting use of lifts, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A18.1 and governing regulations and agencies. G. Operating Test: In addition to above testing, load lifts to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes between lowest and highest landings served. Readjust stops, signal equipment, and other devices for accurate stopping and operation of system. 3.2 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair, or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting. WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 144200-2 BYU-Idaho- Austin Building Remodel PERMIT SET I May 31, 2017 END OF SECTION 144200 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 144200-3 Blank Page